Hall of Raziel™ , found with , and of the Ages Raziel's Mercy™ Found a phone? Raziel's Mercy™ shows a calm blessing screen with a simple invitation: call the owner. A masked Call button reaches them without showing their number. No pressure. No threats. For finders → Raziel's Library™ Raziel's Library™ holds Sefer Raziel ha-Malakh (Amsterdam 1701, Hebrew and English, six parts), the Gutenberg Bible (Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, 3 Esdras, Judith, Esther, Job and Psalms), 1 Enoch, Jubilees, and the Book of Giants. Enter the Library → Hall of Raziel™ chat room Coming Soon. In the meantime, join us on RUEZALS.chat. Enter RUEZALS.chat Raziel's Mercy™ A lost Android recovery system. When your phone is lost, Mercy turns its screen into a calm, clear, kind blessing so whoever finds it knows how to help. If the phone can't come home, remote erase is there as the last safeguard. How Mercy works → Raziel speaks (paraphrased)
Hall of Raziel™ › Library › Hindu › Vishnu Purana › Book II

Vishnu Purana · Hindu shelf

Vishnu Purana, Book IIविष्णुपुराणम्

The earth, the spheres and the heavens. 16 chapters, Sanskrit beside H. H. Wilson’s English (1840).

Chapter: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

II.1Book II, Chapter 1 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

मैत्रेय उवाच ।
भगवन् सम्यागाख्यातं ममैतदखिलं त्वया ।
जगतः सर्गसम्बन्घि यत् पृष्टोऽसि गुरो मया ।। 1 ।।
योऽयमंशो जगत्सृष्टिसम्बद्धो गदितस्त्वया ।
तत्राहं श्रोतुमिच्छामि भूयोऽपि मुनिसत्तम ।। 2 ।।
प्रियव्रतोत्तानपादौ सुतौ स्वायम्भुवस्य यौ ।
तयोरुत्तानपादस्य ध्रुवः पुत्रस्त्वयोदितः ।.3 ।।
प्रियव्रतस्य नैवोक्ता भवता द्विज सन्ततिः ।
तामहं श्रोतुमिच्छामि प्रसन्नो वक्तुमर्हसि ।। 4 ।।
पराशार उवाच ।
कर्द्दमस्यात्मजां कन्यामुपयेमे प्रियव्रतः ।
सम्राट् कुक्षी च तत्कन्ये दश पुत्रास्तथापरे ।। 5 ।।
महाप्राज्ञा महावीर्य्या विनीता दयिताः पितुः ।
प्रियव्रतसुताः ख्यातास्तेषां नामानि मे श्वृणु ।। 6 ।।
आग्नीध्रश्चाग्निबाहुश्च वपुष्मान् द्युतिमांस्तथा ।
मेधा मेधातिथिर्भव्यः सवनः पुत्र एव च ।। 7 ।।
ज्योतिष्मान् दशमस्तेषां सत्यनामा सुतोऽभवत् ।
प्रियव्रतस्य पुत्रास्तु प्रख्याता बलवीर्य्यतः ।।8 ।।
मेधाग्निबाहुपुत्रास्तु त्रयो योगपरायणाः ।
जातिस्मरा महाभाग न राज्याय मनो दधुः ।। 9 ।।
निर्म्मलाः सर्वकालन्तु समस्तार्थेषु वै मुने ।
चक्रुः क्रिया यथान्यायमफलाकाङ्क्षिणो हि ते ।। 10 ।।
प्रियव्रतो ददौ तेषां सप्तानां मुनिसत्तम !
विभज्य सप्त द्वीपानि मैत्रेय सुमहात्मनाम् ।। 11 ।।
जम्बूद्वीपं महाभाग सोऽग्नीध्राय ददौ पिता ।
मेधातिथेस्तथा प्रादात् प्लक्षद्वीपमथापरम् ।। 12 ।।
शाल्मले च वपुष्मन्तं नरेन्द्रमभिषिक्तवान् ।
ज्योतिष्मन्तं कुशद्रीपे राजानं कृतवान् प्रभुः ।। 13 ।।
द्युतिमन्तं च राजानं क्रौञ्चद्रीपे समादिशत् ।
शाकद्वीपेश्वरञ्चापि भव्यञ्चक्रे च स प्रभुः ।। 14 ।।
सवनं पुष्करद्वीपे राजानं समकारयत ।। 15 ।।
जम्बूद्वीपेश्वरो यस्तु आग्नीध्रो मुनिसत्तम ।
तस्य पुत्रा बभुवुस्ते प्रजापतिसमा नव ।। 16 ।।
नाभिः किम्पुरुषश्वे वै हरिवर्ष इलावृतः ।
रम्यो हिरण्वान् षष्ठश्च कुरुर्भद्राश्व एव च ।। 17 ।।
केतुमालस्तथैवान्यः साधुचेष्टो नृपोऽभवत् ।
जम्बूद्रीपविभागांश्च तषां विप्र निशामय ।। 18 ।।
पित्रा दत्तं हिमाह्वन्तु वर्षं नाभेस्तु दक्षिणम् ।
हेमकूटं तथा वर्षं ददौ किम्पुरुषाय सः ।। 19 ।।
तृतीयं नैषधं वर्षं हरिवर्षाय दत्तवान ।
इलावृताय प्रददौ मैरुर्यत्र तु मध्यगः ।। 20 ।।
नीलाचलाश्वितं वर्षं रम्याय प्रददौ पिता ।
श्वेतं तदुत्तरं वर्षं पित्रा दत्तं हिरण्वते ।। 21 ।।
यदुत्तरं श्वृङ्गवतो वर्षं तत् कुरवे ददौ ।
मेरोः पूर्व्वेणा यद् वर्षं भद्राश्वाय प्रदत्तवान् ।। 22 ।।
गन्धमादनवर्षन्तु केतुमालाय दत्तवान ।
इत्येतानि ददौ तेभ्यः पुत्रेभ्यः स नरेश्वरः ।। 23।।
वर्षेष्वेतेषु तान् पुत्रानभिषितच्य स भूमिपः ।
शालग्रामं महापुण्यं मैत्रेय तपसे ययौ ।। 24 ।।
यानि किंपुरुषादीनि वर्षाण्यष्टौ महामुने।
तेषां स्वाभाविकी सिद्धिः सुखप्राया ह्ययत्नतः ।। 25 ।।
विपर्य्ययो न तेष्वस्ति जरामृत्युभयं न च ।
धर्म्माधर्म्मौ न तेष्वास्तां नोत्तमाधममध्यमाः।।२६।।
न तेष्वस्ति युगावस्था क्षेत्रेष्वष्टासु सर्व्वदा ।
हिमाह्वयं तु वै वर्षं नाभेरासीन्महात्मनः ।। 27 ।।
तस्यर्षभोऽभवत् पुत्रो मेरुदेव्यां महाद्युतिः ।
ऋषभाद् भरतो जज्ञ ज्येष्ठःपुत्रशतस्य सः ।। 28 ।।
कृत्वा राज्यं स्वधर्म्मेण तथेष्ट्वा विविधान् मखान् ।
अभिषच्य सुतं ज्येष्ठं भरतं पृथिवीपतिम् ।। 29 ।।
तपसे स महाभागः पुलस्त्यस्याश्रमं ययौ ।
वानप्रस्थविधानेन तत्रापि कृतनिश्चयः ।। 30 ।।
तपस्तेपे यथान्यायं यदा च स महीपतिः ।
तपसा कर्शितोऽत्यर्थं कृशो धमनिसन्ततः ।। 31 ।।
नग्नो वीटां मुखे दत्त्वा वीराध्वानं ततो गतः ।
ततश्च भारतं वर्षमेतल्लोकेषु गीयते ।। 32 ।।
भरताय यतः पित्रा दत्तं प्रातिष्ठता वनम् ।
सुमतिर्भरतस्याभूत् पुत्रः परमधार्म्मिकः ।। 33 ।।
कृत्वा सम्यग् ददौ तस्मै राज्यमिष्टमखः पिता ।
पुत्रसंक्रमितश्रीस्तु भरतः स महीपतिः ।। 34 ।।
योगाभ्यासरतः प्राणान् शालग्रामेऽत्यजन्मुने ।
अजायत च विप्रोऽसौ योगिनां प्रवरे कुले ।। 35 ।।
मैत्रय । तस्य चरितं कथयिष्यामि ते पुनः ।
सुमतेस्तेजसस्तस्मादिन्द्रद्युम्नो व्यजायत ।। 36 ।।
परमेष्ठी ततस्तस्मात् प्रतिहारस्तदन्वयः ।
प्रतिहर्त्तेति विख्यात उत्पन्नस्तस्य चात्मजः ।। 37 ।।
भुवस्तस्मात् तथोद्गीथः प्रस्तारस्तत्सुतो विभुः ।
पृथुस्ततोऽभवन्नक्तो नक्तस्यापि गयः सुतः ।। 38 ।।
नरो गयस्य तनयस्तत्पुत्रोऽभूद् विराट् ततः ।
तस्य पुत्रो महावीर्य्यो धीमांस्तस्मादजायत ।। 39 ।।
महान्तस्तत्सुतश्चाभूनूमनस्युस्तस्य चात्मजः ।
त्वष्टा त्वष्टुश्च विरजो रजस्तस्याप्यभूत् सुतः ।। 40 ।।
शतजिद्रजसस्तस्य जज्ञ पुत्रशतं मनने ।
विशगूज्योतिःप्रधानास्ते यैरिमा वर्द्धिताः प्रजाः ।।41 ।।
तैरिदं भारतं वर्षं नवभेदमलङ्गतम ।
तेषां वंशप्रसूतैश्च भुक्तेयें भारती पुरा ।। 42 ।।
कृतत्रेतादिसर्गेण युगाख्या ह्म क्सप्ततिः ।। 43 ।।
एष स्वायम्भुवः सर्गो येनेदं पूरितं जगत् ।
वाराहे तु मुने ! कल्पे पूर्वमन्वान्तराधिपः ।। 44 ।।

English Wilson 1840

VISHŃU PURÁŃA. BOOK II. CHAP. I.

Descendants of Priyavrata, the eldest son of Swáyambhuva Manu: his ten sons: three adopt a religious life; the others become kings of the seven Dwípas, or isles, of the earth. Agnídhra, king of Jambu-dwípa, divides it into nine portions, which he distributes amongst his sons. Nábhi, king of the south, succeeded by Rishabha; and he by Bharata: India named after him Bhárata: his descendants reign during the Swáyambhuva Manwantara.

MAITREYA.--You have related to me, venerable preceptor, most fully, all that I was curious to hear respecting the creation of the world; but there is a part of the subject which I am desirous again to have described. You stated that Priyavrata and Uttánapáda were the sons of Swáyambhuva Manu, and you repeated the story of Dhruva, the son of Uttánapáda: you made no mention of the descendants of Priyavrata, and it is an account of his family that I beg you will kindly communicate to me.

PARÁŚARA.--Priyavrata married Kámyá, the daughter of the patriarch Kardama 1, and had by her two daughters, Samrát and Kukshi, and ten

p. 162

sons, wise, valiant, modest, and dutiful, named Agnídhra, Agnibáhu, Vapushmat, Dyutimat, Medha, Medhatithi, Bhavya, Savala, Putra, and the tenth was Jyotishmat 2, illustrious by nature as by name. These were the sons of Priyavrata, famous for strength and prowess. Of these, three, or Medha, Putra, and Agnibáhu, adopted a religious life: remembering the occurrences of a prior existence, they did not covet dominion, but diligently practised the rites of devotion in due season, wholly disinterested, and looking for no reward.

Priyavrata having divided the earth into seven continents, gave them respectively to his other seven sons 3. To Agnídhra he gave Jambu-dwípa; to Medhatithi he gave Plaksha-dwípa: he installed Vapushmat in the sovereignty over the Dwípa of Sálmali; and made Jyotishmat king of Kuśa-dwípa: he appointed Dyutimat to rule over Krauncha-dwípa; Bhavya to reign over Sáka-dwípa; and Savala he nominated the monarch of the Dwípa of Pushkara.

Agnídhra, the king of Jambu-dwípa, had nine sons, equal in splendour to the patriarchs: they were named Nábhi, Kimpurusha, Harivarsha, Ilávrita, Ramya, Hirańvat, Kuru, Bhadráśwa, and Ketumála 4, who was a prince ever active in the practice of piety.

Hear next, Maitreya, in what manner Agnídhra apportioned Jambu-dwípa amongst his nine sons. He gave to Nábhi the country called Hima, south of the Himavat, or snowy mountains. The country of Hemakút́a he gave to Kimpurusha; and to Harivarsha, the country of

p. 163

[paragraph continues] Nishadha. The region in the centre of which mount Meru is situated he conferred on Ilávrita; and to Ramya, the countries lying between it and the Níla mountain. To Hirańvat his father gave the country lying to the north of it, called Śweta; and, on the north of the Śweta mountains, the country bounded by the Śringaván range he gave to Kuru. The countries on the east of Meru he assigned to Bhadráśwa; and Gandhamádana, which lay west of it, he gave to Ketumála 5.' Having installed his sons sovereigns in these several regions, the pious king Agnídhra retired to a life of penance at the holy place of pilgrimage, Śálagráma 6.

The eight Varshas, or countries, Kimpurusha and the rest, are places of perfect enjoyment, where happiness is spontaneous and uninterrupted. In them there is no vicissitude, nor the dread of decrepitude or death: there is no distinction of virtue or vice, nor difference of degree as better or worse, nor any of the effects produced in this region by the revolutions of ages.

Nábhi, who had for his portion the country of Himáhwa, had by his queen Meru the magnanimous Rishabha; and he had a hundred sons, the eldest of whom was Bharata. Rishabha having ruled with equity and wisdom, and celebrated many sacrificial rites, resigned the sovereignty of the earth to the heroic Bharata, and, retiring to the hermitage of Pulastya, adopted the life of an anchoret, practising religious penance, and performing all prescribed ceremonies, until, emaciated by his austerities, so as to be but a collection of skin and fibres, he put a pebble in his mouth, and naked went the way of all flesh 7. The country was

p. 164

termed Bhárata from the time that it was relinquished to Bharata by his father, on his retiring to the woods 8.

Bharata, having religiously discharged the duties of his station, consigned the kingdom to his son Sumati, a most virtuous prince; and, engaging in devout practices, abandoned his life at the holy place, Śálagráma: he was afterwards born again as a Brahman, in a distinguished family of ascetics. I shall hereafter relate to you his history.

From the illustrious Sumati was born Indradyumna: his son was Paramesht́hin: his son was Pratihára, who had a celebrated son, named

p. 165

[paragraph continues] Pratiharttá: his son was Bhava, who begot Udgítha, who begot Prastára; whose son was Prithu. The son of Prithu was Nakta: his son was Gaya: his son was Nara; whose son was Virát. The valiant son of Virát was Dhímat, who begot Mahánta; whose son was Manasyu; whose son was Twasht́ri: his son was Víraja: his son was Rája: his son was Śatajit, who had a hundred sons, of whom Viswagjyotish was the eldest 9. Under these princes, Bhárata-varsha (India) was divided into nine portions (to be hereafter particularized); and their descendants successively held possession of the country for seventy-one periods of the aggregate of the four ages (or for the reign of a Manu).

This was the creation of Swáyambhuva Manu, by which the earth was peopled, when he presided over the first Manwantara, in the Kalpa of Varáha 10

Translator’s notes (10)
  1. The text reads Kanyá; and the commentator has, 'he married the daughter of Kardama, whose name was Kanyá.' The copies agree in the reading, and the Váyu has the same name, Kanyá; but the Márkańd́eya, which is the same in other respects as our text, has Kámyá: Kámyá also is the name elsewhere given by the Váyu to the daughter of Kardama (p. 83. n. 6). Kámyá, as has been noticed, appears in the Bráhma and Hari V. (p. 53. n. 6) as the mother of Priyavrata, but erroneously; and the same authorities specify a Kámyá as the wife of that sovereign. So the commentator on the Hari V. states, 'another Kámyá is mentioned (in the text), the daughter of Kardama, the wife of Priyavrata.' p. 162 The name Kanyá is therefore most probably an error of the copyists. The Bhágavata calls the wife of Priyavrata, Varhishmatí, the daughter of Viśwakarman.

  2. These names nearly agree in the authorities which specify the descendants of Priyavrata, except in the Bhágavata: that has an almost entirely different series of names, or Ágnidhra, Idhmajihwa, Yajnabáhu, Mahávíra, Hirańyaretas, Medhatithi, Ghritaprisht́ha, Savana, Vitihotra, and Kavi; with one daughter, Urjjaswatí. It also calls the Manus Uttama, Tamasa, and Raivata the sons of Priyavrata by another wife.

  3. According to the Bhágavata, he drove his chariot seven times round the earth, and the ruts left by the wheels became the beds of the oceans, separating it into seven Dwípas.

  4. Even the Bhágavata concurs with the other Puráńas in this series of Priyavrata's grandsons.

  5. Of these divisions, as well as of those of the earth, and of the minor divisions of the Varshas, we have further particulars in the following chapter.

  6. This place of pilgrimage has not been found elsewhere. The term is usually applied to a stone, an ammonite, which is supposed to be a type of Vishńu, and of which the worship is enjoined in the Uttara Khańd́a of the Padma P. and in the Brahma Vaivartta, authorities of no great weight or antiquity. As these stones are found chiefly in the Gandak river, the Sálagráma Tírtha was probably at the source of that stream, or at its confluence with the Ganges. Its sanctity, and that of the stone, are probably of comparatively modern origin.

  7. 'The great road,' or 'road of heroes.' The pebble was intended either to compel perpetual silence, or to prevent his eating. The Bhágavata p. 164 adverts to the same circumstance. That work enters much more into detail on the subject of Rishabha's devotion, and particularizes circumstances not found in any other Puráńa. The most interesting of these are the scene of Rishabha's wanderings, which is said to be Konka, Venkat́a, Kút́aka, and southern Karnátaka, or the western part of the Peninsula; and the adoption of the Jain belief by the people of those countries. Thus it is said, "A king of the Konkas, Venkat́as, and Kút́akas, named Arhat, having heard the tradition of Rishabha's practices (or his wandering about naked, and desisting from religious rites), being infatuated by necessity, under the evil influence of the Kali age, will become needlessly alarmed, and abandon his own religious duty, and will foolishly enter upon an unrighteous and heretical path. Misled by him, and bewildered by the iniquitous operation of the Kali age, disturbed also by the delusions of the deity, wicked men will, in great numbers, desert the institutes and purifications of their own ritual; will observe vows injurious and disrespectful to the gods; will desist from ablutions, mouth-washings, and purifications, and will pluck out the hair of the head; and will revile the world, the deity, sacrifices, Brahmans, and the Vedas." It is also said, that Sumati, the son of Bharata, will be irreligiously worshipped by some infidels, as a divinity. Besides the import of the term Arhat, or Jain, Rishabha is the name of the first, and Sumati of the fifth Tírthakara, or Jain saint of the present era. There can be no doubt, therefore, that the Bhágavata intends this sect; and as the Jain system was not matured until a comparatively modern date, this composition is determined to be also recent. The allusions to the extension of the Jain faith in the western parts of the Peninsula, may serve to fix the limit of its probable antiquity to the 11th or 12th century, when the Jains seem to have been flourishing in Guzerat and the Konkan. As. Res. XVII. 232.

  8. This etymology is given in other Puráńas; but the Matsya and Váyu have a different one, deriving it from the Manu, called Bharata, or the cherisher, one who rears or cherishes progeny. The Váyu has, in another place, the more common explanation also: ###.

  9. The Agni, Kúrma, Márkańd́eya, Linga, and Váyu Puráńas agree with the Vishńu in these genealogical details. The Bhágavata has some additions and variations of nomenclature, but is not essentially different. It ends, however, with Śatajit, and cites a stanza which would seem to make Viraja the last of the descendants of Priyavrata.

  10. The descendants of Priyavrata were the kings of the earth in the first or Swáyambhuva Manwantara. Those of Uttánapáda, his brother, are placed rather incongruously in the second or Swárochisha Manwantara: whilst, with still more palpable inconsistency, Daksha, a descendant of Uttánapáda, gives his daughter to Kaśyapa in the seventh or Vaivaswata Manwantara. It seems probable that the patriarchal genealogies are older than the chronological system of Manwantaras and Kalpas, and have been rather clumsily distributed amongst the different periods.

II.2Book II, Chapter 2 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

मैत्रेय उवाच ।
कथितो भवता ब्रह्मन् ! सर्गः स्वायम्भुवश्च मे ।
श्रोतुमिच्छाम्यहं त्वत्तः सकलं मण्डलं भुवः ।। 1 ।।
यावन्तः सागरा द्रीपास्तथा वर्षाणि पर्व्वताः ।
वनानि सरितः पुर्थ्यौ देवादीनां तथा मने ।। 2 ।।
यत्प्रमाणमिदं सर्व्वं यदाधारं यदात्मकम् ।
संस्थानमस्य च मुने ! यथावद वक्तुमर्हसि ।। 3 ।।
पराशर उवाच ।
मैत्रेय श्वूयतामेत्त संक्षेपाद गदतो मम ।
नास्य वर्ष शतेनापि वक्तु शक्यो हि विस्तरः ।। 4 ।।
जम्बू-प्लक्षह्वयौ द्रीपौ शाल्मलिशचापरो द्रिज ।
कुशः क्रौञ्चस्तथा शाकः पुष्करश्चैव सप्तमः ।। 5 ।।
एते द्रीपाः समुद्रस्तु सप्त सप्तभिरावृताः ।
लवणेक्षु-सुरा-सर्पिर्दधि-दुग्ध-जलैःसमम् ।। 6 ।।
जम्बूद्रीपः समस्तानाम् एतेषां मध्यसंस्थितः ।
तस्यापि मैरुर्म्मैत्रेय ! मध्ये कनकपर्व्वतः ।। 7 ।।
प्रविष्टः षोड़शाधस्ताद् द्रात्रिंशन्मूदूर्ध्न विस्तृतः ।। 8 ।।
मूले षोड़शसाहस्त्रो विस्तारस्तस्य सर्व्वशः ।
भूपद्मस्यास्य शैलेशः कर्णिकाकारसंस्थितः ।। 9 ।।
हिमवान् हेमकूटश्च निषधश्वास्य दक्षिणो ।
नीलः श्वेतश्व श्वृङ्गी च उत्तरे वर्षपर्व्वताः ।। 10 ।।
लक्षप्रमाणौ द्रौ मध्यौ दशहीनास्तथापरे ।
सहस्त्रद्रितयोच्छायास्तावदविस्तारिणश्व ते ।। 11 ।।
भारतं प्रथमं बर्षं ततः किम्पुरुषं स्मृतम् ।
हरिवर्षं वान्यन्मेरोर्दक्षिणातो द्रिज ।। 12 ।।
रम्यकञ्चोत्तरे वर्षं तस्यैवानु हिरण्मयम् ।
उत्तराःकुरवश्चैव यथा वै भारतं तथा ।। 13 ।।
नवसाहस्त्रमेकैकमेतेषां द्रिजसत्तम् !
इलावृतञ्च तन्मध्ये सौवर्णो मेरुरुच्छितः ।। 14 ।।
मेरोश्वतुर्दिशं तत्तु नवसाहस्त्रविस्तृतम् ।
इलावृतं महाभाग ! चत्वारश्वात्र पर्व्वताः ।। 15 ।।
विष्कम्भा रचिता मरोर्योजनायुतमुच्छिताः ।। 16 ।।
पूर्व्वेण मन्दरो नाम दक्षिणो गन्धमादनः ।
विपुलः पश्विमे पाश्व सुपार्श्वश्वोत्तरे स्मृतः ।। 17 ।।
कदम्बस्तेषु जम्बूश्व पिप्पलो वट एव च ।
एकादशशाततायामाः पादपा गिरिकेतवः ।। 18 ।।
जम्बूद्रीपस्य सा जम्बूर्नामहेतुर्महामुने ।
महागजप्रमाणानि जम्ब्वास्तस्याः फलानि वै ।। 19 ।।
पतन्ति भूभृतः पृष्ठे शीर्य्यमाणानि सर्वतः ।
रसेन तेषां प्रख्याता तत्र जम्बूनदीति वै ।। 20 ।।
सरित् प्रवर्त्तते सा च पीयते तन्निवासिभिः ।
नि स्वेदो न च दौर्गन्ध्यं न जरा नेन्द्रियक्षयः ।। 21 ।।
तत्पानात् स्वच्छमनसां जनानां तत्र जायते ।
तीरमृत् तदूरसं प्राप्य सुखवायुविशोषिता ।
जाम्बूनदाख्यं भवति सुवर्णं सिद्धभूषणम् ।। 22 ।।
भद्राश्वं पूर्व्वतो मेरोः केतुमालञ्च पश्चिमे ।
वर्षे द्र तु मुनिश्वष्ठ! तयोर्म्मध्ये इलावृतम् ।। 23 ।।
वनं चैत्ररथं पूर्व्वे दक्षिणो गन्दमादनम् ।
वैभ्राजं पश्विमे तदूदुत्तरे नन्दनं स्मृतम् ।। 24 ।।
अरुणोदं महाभद्रमसितोधं समानसम् ।
सरोस्येतानि चत्वारि देवभोग्यानि सर्व्वदा ।। 25 ।।
शीतान्तश्वक्रमुञ्जश्व कुररी माल्यवांस्तथा ।
वैकङ्कप्रमुखा मैरोःपूर्व्वतः केशराचलाः ।
त्रिकूटः शिशिरश्चैव पतङ्गो रुचकस्यथा ।। 26 ।।
निषधाद्या दक्षिणातस्तस्य केसरपर्व्वताः ।
शिखिवासाः सवैदूर्य्यः कपिलो गन्धमादनः ।
जारुधिप्रमुखास्तदूत् पश्विमे केसराचलाः ।। 27 ।।
मेरोरनन्तराङ्गषुं जठरादिष्ववस्थिताः ।
शङ्खकूटोऽथ ऋषभो हंसो नागस्तथापरः।
कालञ्जराद्याश्व तथा उत्तरे केशराचलाः ।। 28 ।।
चतुर्ददशसहस्त्राणि योजनानां महापुरी ।
मेरोरुपरि मैत्रेय! ब्रह्मणःप्रथिता दिवि ।। 29 ।।
तस्याः समन्ततश्वाशष्टौ दिशासु विदिशासु च ।
इन्द्रादिलोकपालानां प्रख्याताः प्रवराःपुरः ।। 30 ।।
विष्णुपादविनिष्कान्ता प्लावयित्वेन्दुमणडलम् ।
समन्ताद् ब्रह्मणाः पुर्य्यां गङ्गा पतति वै दिवः ।। 31 ।।
सा तत्र पतिता दिक्षु चतुर्धा प्रतिपद्यते ।
सीता चालकनन्दा च चक्षुर्भदा च वै क्रमात् ।। 32 ।।
पूर्व्वेण शैलात् सीता तु शैलं यात्यन्तरिक्षगा ।
ततश्व पूर्व्ववर्षेण भद्राश्वेनैति सार्णवम् ।। 33 ।।
तथैवालकनन्दापि दक्षिणोनैत्य भारतम् ।
प्रयाति सागरं भूत्वा सप्तभेदा महामुने ।। 34 ।।
चक्षुश्च पश्विमगिरीनतीत्य सकलांस्ततः ।
पश्विमं केतुमालाख्यं वष गत्वैति सागरम् ।। 35 ।।
भद्रा तथोत्तरगिरीनुत्तरांश्व तथा कुरून् ।
अतीत्योत्तरमम्भोधिं समब्योति महामुने ।। 36 ।।
आनीलनिषधायामौ माल्यवदू-गन्धमादनौ ।
तयोर्म्मध्यगतो मेरुः कर्णिकाकारसंस्थितः ।। 37 ।।
भारताः केतुमालाश्व भद्राश्वाः कुरवस्तथा ।
पत्राणि लोकपह्मस्य मर्य्यादा शैलबाह्मतः ।। 38 ।।
जठरो देवकूटश्च मर्य्यादापर्व्वतावुभौ ।
तौ दक्षिणोत्तरायामावानीलनिषधायतौ ।। 39 ।।
गन्धमादन-कैलासौ पूर्व्वपश्चायतावुभौ ।
अशीतियोजनायामावर्णावान्तर्व्यवस्थितौ ।। 40 ।।
निषधः पारिपात्रश्च मर्य्यादापर्व्वतावुभौ ।
मेरोः परिचमदिगभागे यता पूर्व्वौ तथा स्थितौ ।। 41 ।।
त्रिश्वृह्गो जारुधिश्चैव उत्तरौ वर्षपर्व्वतौ ।
पूर्व्वपश्वायतावेतावर्णवान्तर्व्यवस्थितौ ।। 42 ।।
इत्येते मुनिवर्य्योक्ता मर्य्यादापर्व्वतास्तव ।
जठराद्याः स्थिता मेरोस्तेषां द्रौ द्रौ चतुर्दिशम् ।। 43 ।।
मैरोश्चतुर्दिशं ये तु प्रोक्ताः केसरपर्व्वताः ।
शीतान्ताद्या मुने ! तेषामतीव हि मनोरमाः ।। 44 ।।
शैलानामन्तरे द्रोण्यः सिद्धचारणसेविताः ।
सुरम्याणि तथा तासु काननानि पुराणि च ।। 45 ।।
लक्ष्मी-विष्णवग्निसूर्य्यादिदेवानां मुनिसत्तम् ।
तास्वायतनवर्षाणि जुष्टानि वरकिन्नरैः ।। 46 ।।
गन्घर्व्वयक्षरक्षांसि तथा दैतेयदानवाः ।
क्रीड़न्ति तासु रम्यासु शैलद्रोणीष्वहर्निशम् ।। 47 ।।
भौमा ह्येते स्मृताः स्वर्गा धर्म्मिणामालया मुने ।
नैतेषु पापकर्म्मणो यान्ति जन्मशतैरपि ।। 48 ।।
भद्राश्वे भगवान् विष्णुरास्ते हयशिरा द्विज ।
वराहः केतुमाले तु भारते कूर्म्मरूपधृक् ।। 49 ।।
मत्स्यरूपश्व गोविन्दः कुरुष्वास्ते जनार्द्दनः ।
विश्वरूपेण सर्व्वत्र सर्व्वः सर्वत्रगो हरिः ।। 50 ।।
सर्व्वस्याधारभूतोऽसौ मैत्रेयास्तेऽखिलात्मकः ।
यानि किम्पुरुषादीनि वर्षाण्यष्टौ महामुने ।
न तेषु शोको नायासो नोद्वेगः क्षुद्भयादिकम् ।। 51 ।।
सुस्थाः प्रजा निरातङ्काः सर्व्वदुःखविवर्ज्जिताः ।
दशद्वादशवर्षाणां सहस्त्राणि स्थिरायुषः ।। 52 ।।
न तेषु वर्षते देवो भौमान्यम्भांसि तेषु वै ।
कृत-त्रेतादिका नैव तेषु स्थानेषु कल्पना ।। 53 ।।
सर्व्वेष्वेतेषु वर्षेषु सप्त सप्त कुलाचलाः ।
नद्यश्व शतशस्तेभ्यः प्रसूता या द्विजोत्तम ।। 54 ।।

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. II.

Description of the earth. The seven Dwípas and seven seas. Jambu-dwípa. Mount Meru: its extent and boundaries. Extent of Ilávrita. Groves, lakes, and branches of Meru. Cities of the gods. Rivers. The forms of Vishńu worshipped in different Varshas.

MAITREYA.--You have related to me, Brahman, the creation of Swáyambhuva; I am now desirous to hear from you a description of the earth: how many are its oceans and islands, its kingdoms and its mountains, its forests and rivers and the cities of the gods, its dimensions, its contents, its nature, and its form.

PARÁŚARA.--You shall hear, Maitreya, a brief account of the earth from me: a full detail I could not give you in a century.

The seven great insular continents are Jambu, Plaksha, Sálmali, Kuśa, Krauncha, Śáka, and Pushkara: and they are surrounded severally by seven great seas; the sea of salt water (Lavańa), of sugar-cane juice (Ikshu), of wine (Surá), of clarified butter (Sarpi), of curds (Dadhi), of milk (Dugdha), and of fresh water (Jala) 1.

Jambu-dwípa is in the centre of all these: and in the centre of this continent is the golden mountain Meru. The height of Meru is eighty-four thousand Yojanas; and its depth below the surface of the earth is

p. 167

sixteen thousand. Its diameter at the summit is thirty-two thousand Yojanas; and at its base, sixteen thousand: so that this mountain is like the seed-cup of the lotus of the earth 2.

The boundary mountains (of the earth) are Himaván, Hemakút́a, and Nishadha, which lie south of Meru; and Níla, Śweta, and Śringí, which are situated to the north of it. The two central ranges (those next to Meru, or Nishadha and Níla) extend for a hundred thousand (Yojanas, running east and west). Each of the others diminishes ten thousand Yojanas, as it lies more remote from the centre. They are two thousand Yojanas in height, and as many in breadth 3. The Varshas or countries between these ranges are Bhárata (India), south of the Himaván mountains;

p. 168

next Kimpurusha, between Himaván and Hemakút́a; north of the latter, and south of Nishadha, is Hariversha; north of Meru is Ramyaka, extending from the Níla or blue mountains to the Śweta (or white) mountains; Hirańmaya lies between the Śweta and Śringí ranges; and Uttarakuru is beyond the latter, following the same direction as Bhárata 4. Each of these is nine thousand Yojanas in extent. Ilávrita is of similar dimensions, but in the centre of it is the golden mountain Meru, and the country extends nine thousand Yojanas in each direction from the four sides of the mountain 5. There are four mountains in this Varsha, formed as buttresses to Meru, each ten thousand Yojanas in elevation: that on the east is called Mandara; that on the south, Gandhamádana; that on the west, Vipula; and that on the north, Supárśwa 6: on each of these stands severally a Kadamba-tree, a Jambu-tree, a Pípal, and a Vat́a 7; each spreading over eleven hundred Yojanas, and towering aloft like banners on the mountains. From the Jambu-tree the insular continent Jambu-dwípa derives its appellations. The apples of that tree are as large as elephants: when they are rotten, they fall upon the crest of the mountain, and from their expressed juice is formed the Jambu river, the waters of which are drunk by the inhabitants; and in consequence of drinking of that stream, they pass their days in content and health, being subject neither to perspiration, to foul odours, to decrepitude, nor organic decay. The soil on the banks of the river, absorbing the Jambu juice, and being dried by gentle breezes, becomes the gold termed Jámbunada, of which the ornaments of the Siddhas are fabricated.

p. 169

The country of Bhadráśwa lies on the east of Meru, and Ketumála on the west; and between these two is the region of Ilávrita. On the east of the same is the forest Chaitraratha; the Gandhamádana wood is on the south; the forest of Vaibhrája is on the west; and the grove of Indra, or Nandana, is on the north. There are also four great lakes, the waters of which are partaken of by the gods, called Aruńoda, Mahábhadra, Śítoda, and Mańasa 8.

The principal mountain ridges which project from the base of Meru, like filaments from the root of the lotus, are, on the east, Śítánta, Mukunda, Kurarí, Mályaván, and Vaikanka; on the south, Trikút́a, Śiśira, Patanga, Ruchaka, and Nishadha; on the west, Śikhivásas, Vaidúrya, Kapila, Gandhamádana, and Járudhi; and on the north, Śankhakút́a, Rishabha, Nága, Hansa, and Kálanjara. These and others extend from between the intervals in the body, or from the heart, of Meru 9.

On the summit of Meru is the vast city of Brahmá, extending fourteen thousand leagues, and renowned in heaven; and around it, in the cardinal points and the intermediate quarters, are situated the stately cities of Indra and the other regents of the spheres 10. The capital of Brahmá

p. 170

is enclosed by the river Ganges, which, issuing from the foot of Vishńu, and washing the lunar orb, falls here from the skies 11, and, after encircling the city, divides into four mighty rivers, flowing in opposite directions. These rivers are the Śítá, the Alakanandá, the Chakshu, and the Bhadrá. The first, falling upon the tops of the inferior mountains, on the east side of Meru, flows over their crests, and passes through the country of Bhadráśwa to the ocean: the Alakanandá flows south, to the country of Bhárata, and, dividing into seven rivers on the way, falls into the sea: the Chakshu falls into the sea, after traversing all the western mountains, and passing through the country of Ketumála: and the

p. 171

[paragraph continues] Bhadrá washes the country of the Uttara kurus, and empties itself into the northern ocean 12.

Meru, then, is confined between the mountains Níla and Nishadha (on the north and south), and between Mályaván and Gandhamádana (on the west and east 13): it lies between them like the pericarp of a lotus. The countries of Bhárata, Ketumála, Bhadráśwa, and Uttarakuru lie, like leaves of the lotus of the world, exterior to the boundary mountains. Jat́hara and Devakút́a are two mountain ranges, running north and south, and connecting the two chains of Nishadha and Níla. Gandhamádana

p. 172

and Kailása extend, east and west, eighty Yojanas in breadth, from sea to sea. Nishadha and Páriyátra are the limitative mountains on the west, stretching, like those on the east, between the Níla and Nishadha ranges: and the mountains Triśringa and Járudhi are the northern limits of Meru, extending, east and west, between the two seas 14. Thus I have repeated to you the mountains described by great sages as the boundary mountains, situated in pairs, on each of the four sides of Meru. Those also, which have been mentioned as the filament mountains (or spurs), Śítánta and the rest, are exceedingly delightful. The vallies embosomed amongst them are the favourite resorts of the Siddhas and Chárańas: and there are situated upon them agreeable forests, and pleasant cities, embellished with the palaces of Vishńu, Lakshmí, Agni, Súrya, and other deities, and peopled by celestial spirits; whilst the Yakshas, Rákshasas, Daityas, and Dánavas pursue their pastimes in the vales. These, in short, are the regions of Paradise, or Swarga, the seats of the righteous, and where the wicked do not arrive even after a hundred births.

p. 173

In the country of Bhadráśwa, Vishńu resides as Hayasírá (the horse-headed); in Ketumála, as Varáha (the boar); in Bhárata, as the tortoise (Kúrma); in Kuru, as the fish (Matsya); in his universal form, every where; for Hari pervades all places: he, Maitreya, is the supporter of all things; he is all things. In the eight realms of Kimpurusha and the rest (or all exclusive of Bhárata) there is no sorrow, nor weariness, nor anxiety, nor hunger, nor apprehension; their inhabitants are exempt from all infirmity and pain, and live in uninterrupted enjoyment for ten or twelve thousand years. Indra never sends rain upon them, for the earth abounds with water. In those places there is no distinction of Krita, Treta, or any succession of ages. In each of these Varshas there are respectively seven principal ranges of mountains, from which, oh best of Brahmans, hundreds of rivers take their rise 15.

Translator’s notes (15)
  1. The geography of the Puráńas occurs in most of these works; and in all the main features, the seven Dwípas, seven seas, the divisions of Jambu-dwípa, the situation and extent of Meru, and the subdivisions of Bhárata, is the same. The Agni and Bráhma are word for word the same with our text; and the Kúrma, Linga, Matsya, Márkańd́eya, and Váyu present many passages common to them and the Vishńu, or to one another. The Váyu, as usual, enters most fully into particulars. The Bhágavata differs in its nomenclature of the subordinate details from all, and is followed by the Padma. The others either omit the subject, or advert to it but briefly. The Mahábhárata, Bhíshma Parva, has an account essentially the same, and many of the stanzas are common to it and different Puráńas. It does not follow the same order, and has some peculiarities; one of which is calling Jambu-dwípa, Sudarśana, such being the name of the Jambu-tree: it is said also to consist of two portions, called Pippala and Śaśa, which are reflected in the lunar orb, as in a mirror.

  2. The shape of Meru, according to this description, is that of an inverted cone; and by the comparison to the seed-cup its form should be circular: but there seems to be some uncertainty upon this subject amongst the Pauráńics. The Padma compares its form to the bell-shaped flower of the Dhatura. The Váyu represents it as having four sides of different colours; or, white on the east, yellow on the south, black on the west, and red on the north; but notices also various opinions of the outline of the mountain, which, according to Atri, had a hundred angles; to Bhrigu, a thousand: Sávarni calls it octangular; Bháguri, quadrangular; and Varsháyani says it has a thousand angles: Gálava makes it saucer-shaped; Garga, twisted, like braided hair; and others maintain that it is circular. The Linga makes its eastern face of the colour of the ruby; its southern, that of the lotus; its western, golden; and its northern, coral. The Matsya has the same colours as the Váyu, and both contain this line: 'Four-coloured, golden, four-cornered lofty:' but the Váyu compares its summit, in one place, to a saucer; and observes that its circumference must be thrice its diameter. The Matsya also, rather incompatibly, says the measurement is that of a circular form, but it is considered quadrangular. According to the Buddhists of Ceylon, Meru is said to be of the same diameter throughout. Those of Nepal conceive it to be shaped like a drum. A translation of the description of Meru and its surrounding mountains, contained in the Brahmáńd́a, which is the same exactly as that in the Váyu, occurs in the As. Researches, VIII. 343. There are some differences in Col. Wilford's version from that which my MSS. would authorize, but they are not in general of much importance. Some, no doubt, depend upon variations in the readings of the different copies: of others, I must question the accuracy.

  3. This diminution is the necessary consequence of the diminished radius of the circle of Jambu-dwípa, as the mountain ranges recede from the centre.

  4. These, being the two outer Varshas, are said to take the form of a bow; that is, they are exteriorly convex, being segments of the circle.

  5. The whole diameter of Jambu-dwípa has been said to be 100,000 Yojanas. This is thus divided from north to south: Ilávrita, in the centre, extends each way 9000, making 18000: Meru itself; at the base, is 16000: the six Varshas, at 9000 each, are equal to 54000: and the six ranges, at 2000 each, are 12000: and 18 + 16 + 54 + 12 = 100. From east to west the Varshas are of the extent necessary to occupy the space of the circle.

  6. The Bhágavata and Padma call these Mandara, Merumandara, Supárśwa, and Kumuda.

  7. Nauclea Kadamba, Eugenia Jambu, Ficus religiosa, and F. Indica. The Bhágavata substitutes a mango-tree for the Pípal; placing it on Mandara, the Jambu on Merumandara, the Kadamba on Supárśwa, and the Vat́a on Kumuda.

  8. The Bhágavata substitutes Sarvatobhadra for the Gandhamádana forest; and calls the lakes, lakes of milk, honey, treacle, and sweet water.

  9. The Váyu gives these names, and many more; and describes at great length forests, lakes, and cities of gods and demigods upon these fabulous mountains, or in the valleys between them. (As. Res. VIII. 354.)

  10. The Lokapálas, or eight deities in that character, Indra, Yama, Varuńa, Kuvera, Vivaswat, Soma, Agni, and Váyu. Other cities of the gods are placed upon the spurs, or filament mountains, by the Váyu; or that of Brahmá on Hemaśringa, of Śankara on Kálanjara, of Garud́a on Vaikanka, and of Kuvera on Kailása. Himavat is also specified by the same work as the scene of Śiva's penance, and marriage with Umá; of his assuming the form of a Kiráta, or forester: of the birth of Kártikeya, in the Śara forest; and of his dividing the mountain Krauncha with his spear. This latter legend, having been somewhat misunderstood by Col. Wilford, is made the theme of one of his fanciful verifications. "Here, he (the author of the Váyu) says, in the forest of Śankha, was born Shad́ánana or Kártikeya, Mars with six faces. Here he wished or formed the resolution of going to the mountains of Crauncha, Germany, part of Poland, &c. to rest and recreate himself after his fatigues in the wars of the gods with the giants. There, in the skirts of the mountains p. 170 of Crauncha, he flung his sword; the very same which Attila, in the fifth century, asserted he had found under a clod of earth. It was placed in his tomb, where it is probably to be found." As. Res. VIII. 364. The text of which this is in part a representation is, ###. The legend here alluded to is told at length in the Vámana Puráńa. Mahishásura, flying from the battle, in which Táraka had been slain by Kártikeya, took refuge in a cave in the Krauncha mountain. A dispute arising between Kártikeya and Indra, as to their respective prowess, they determined to decide the question by circumambulating the mountain; the palm to be given to him who should first go round it. Disagreeing about the result, they appealed to the mountain, who untruly decided in favour of Indra. Kártikeya, to punish his injustice, hurled his lance at the mountain Krauncha, and pierced at once it and the demon Mahisha. Another division of Krauncha is ascribed to Paraśuráma. Megha Dúta, v.59. Krauncha is also sometimes considered to be the name of an Asura, killed by Kártikeya; but this is perhaps some misapprehension of the Pauráńic legend by the grammarians, springing out of the synonymes of Kártikeya, Kraunchári, Kraunchadárańa, &c., implying the foe or destroyer of Krauncha, occurring in the Amara, and other Koshas.

  11. The Bhágavata is more circumstantial. The river flowed over the great toe of Vishńu's left foot, which had previously, as he lifted it up, made a fissure in the shell of the mundane egg, and thus gave entrance to the heavenly stream. The Váyu merely brings it from the lunar orb, and takes no notice of Vishńu's interposition. In a different passage it describes the detention of Gangá amidst the tresses of Śiva, in order to correct her arrogance, until the divinity was moved by the penance and prayers of king Bhagíratha to set her free. The Mahábhárata represents Śiva's bearing the river for a hundred years on his head, merely to prevent its falling too suddenly on the mountains.

  12. Although the Váyu has this account, it subsequently inserts another, which is that also of the Matsya and Padma. In this the Ganges, after escaping from Śiva, is said to have formed seven streams; the Naliní, Hládiní, and Pavaní going to the east; the Chakshu, Śítá, and Sindhu to the wrest; and the Bhágirathí to the south. The Mahábhárata calls them Vaswaukasára, Naliní, Pavaní, Gangá, Śítá, Sindhu, and Jambunadí. The more usual legend, however, is the first, and it offers some trace of actual geography. Mr. Faber, indeed, thinks that Meru, with the surrounding Varsha of Ilávrita, and its four rivers, is a representation of the garden of Eden. (Pagan Idolatry, I. 315.) However this may he, it seems not unlikely to have originated in some imperfect account of four great rivers flowing from the Himálaya, and the high lands north of that range, towards the cardinal points: the Bhadrá, to the north, representing the Oby of Siberia; and the Śítá, the river of China, or Hoangho. The Alakanandá is well known as a main branch of the Ganges, near its source; and the Chakshus is very possibly, as Major Wilford supposed, the Oxus. (As. Res. VIII. 309.) The printed copy of the Bhágavata, and the MS. Padma, read Bankshu; but the former is the more usual reading. It is said, in the Váyu, of Ketumála, through which this river runs, that it is peopled by various races of barbarians.

  13. The text applies the latter name so variously as to cause confusion: it is given to one of the four buttresses of Meru, that on the south; to one of the filament mountains, on the west; to a range of boundary mountains, on the south; and to the Varsha of Ketumála: here another mountain range is intended, or a chain running north and south, upon the east of Ilávrita, connecting the Níla and Nishadha ranges. Accordingly the Váyu states it to be 34000 Yojanas in extent; that is, the diameter of Meru 16000, and the breadth of Ilávrita on each side of it, or together 18000. A similar range, that of Mályaván, bounds Ilávrita on the west. It was probably to avoid the confusion arising from similarity of. nomenclature, that the author of the Bhágavata substituted different names for Gandhamádana in the other instances, calling the buttress, as we have seen, Merumandara; the southern forest, Sarvatobhadra; and the filament mountain, Hansa; restricting the term Gandhamádana to the eastern range: a correction, it may be remarked, corroborative of a subsequent date.

  14. These eight mountains are similarly enumerated in the Bhágavata and Váyu, but no mention is made in them of any seas, and it is clear that the eastern and western oceans cannot be intended, as the mountains Mályavat and Gandhamádana intervene. The commentator would seem to understand 'Arńava' as signifying 'mountain,' as he says between the seas means within Mályavat and Gandhamádana; The Bhágavata describes these eight mountains as circling Meru for 18000 Yojanas in each direction, leaving, according to the commentator, an interval of a thousand Yojanas between them and the base of the central mountain, and being 2000 high, and as many broad: they may be understood to be the exterior barriers of Meru, separating it from Ilávritta. The names of these mountains, according to the Bhágavata, are Jat́hara and Devakút́a on the east, Pavana and Parípátra on the west, Triśringa and Makara on the north, and Kailása and Karavíra on the south. Without believing it possible to verify the position of these different creations of the legendary geography of the Hindus, it can scarcely admit of doubt that the scheme was suggested by imperfect acquaintance with the actual character of the country, by the four great ranges, the Altai, Muztag or Thian-shan, Ku-en-nun, and Himálaya, which traverse central Asia in a direction from east to west, with a greater or less inclination from north to south, which are connected or divided by many lofty transverse ridges, which enclose several large lakes, and which give rise to the great rivers that water Siberia, China, Tartary, and Hindustan. (Humboldt on the mountains of Central Asia, and Ritter. Geogr. Asia.)

  15. More ample details of the Varshas are given in the Mahábhárata, Bhágavata, Padma, Váyu, Kúrma, Linga, Matsya, and Márkańd́eya Puráńas; but they are of an entirely fanciful nature. Thus of the Ketumála-varsha it is said, in the Váyu, the men are black, the women of the complexion of the lotus; the people subsist upon the fruit of the Panasa or jack-tree, and live for ten thousand years, exempt from sorrow or sickness: seven Kula or main ranges of mountains in it are named, and a long list of countries and rivers is added, none of which can be identified with any actually existing, except perhaps the greats river the Suchakshus, the Amu or Oxus. According to the Bhágavata, Vishńu is worshipped as Kámadeva in Ketumála. The Váyu says the object of adoration there is Íśwara, the son of Brahmá. Similar circumstances are asserted of the other Varshas. See also As. Res. VIII. 352.

II.3Book II, Chapter 3 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीपराशर उवाच
उत्तरं यत्समुद्रस्य हिमाद्रेश्चैव दक्षिणम् ।
वर्षं तद्भारतं नाम भारती यत्र सन्ततिः ॥ २,३.१ ॥
नवयोजनसाहस्रो विस्तारोस्य महामुने ।
कर्मभूमिरियं स्वर्गमपवर्गं च गच्छताम् ॥ २,३.२ ॥
महेन्द्रो मलयः सह्यः शुक्तिमानृक्षपर्वतः ।
विन्ध्यश्च पारीयात्रश्च सप्तात्र कुलपर्वताः ॥ २,३.३ ॥
अतः संप्राप्यते स्वर्गो सुक्तिमस्मात्प्रयान्ति वै ।
तिर्यक्त्वं नरकं चापि यान्त्यतः पुरुषा मुने ॥ २,३.४ ॥
इतः स्वर्गश्च मोक्षश्च मध्यं चान्तश्च गम्यते ।
न ख्लवन्यत्र मर्त्यानां कर्मभूमौ विधीयते ॥ २,३.५ ॥
भारतस्यास्य वर्षस्य नवभादान्नशामय ।
इद्रद्वीपः कसेरुश्च ताम्रपर्णां गभस्तिमान् ॥ २,३.६ ॥
नागद्वीपस्तथा साम्यो गन्धर्वस्त्वथ चारुणः ।
अयं तु नवमस्तषां द्वीपः सागारसंवृतः ॥ २,३.७ ॥
योजनानां सहस्रं तु द्वीपोयं दक्षिणोत्तरात् ।
पूर्वे किराता यस्यान्ते पश्चिमे यवनाः स्थिताः ॥ २,३.८ ॥
ब्राह्मणाः क्षत्रिया वैश्या मध्ये शब्द्राश्च भागशः ।
इज्यायुधवणिज्याद्यैर्वर्तयन्तो व्यवस्थिताः ॥ २,३.९ ॥
शतद्रूचन्द्रभागाद्या हिमयत्पादनिर्गताः ।
वेदस्मृतिमुखाद्याश्च पारीयात्रोद्भवा मुने ॥ २,३.१० ॥
नर्मदा मुरसाद्याश्च नद्यो विन्ध्याद्रिनिर्गताः ।
तापीपयोष्णीनिर्विन्ध्या प्रसूखा ऋक्षसंभवाः ॥ २,३.११ ॥
गोदावरी भीमरथी कृष्णवेण्यादिकास्तथा ।
सह्यपादोद्भवा नद्यः स्मृताः पापभयापहाः ॥ २,३.१२ ॥
कृतमाला ताम्रपर्णिप्रसुखा मलयोद्भवाः ।
त्रिसामा चर्षिकुल्याद्या महेन्द्रप्रभवाः स्मृताः ॥ २,३.१३ ॥
ऋषिकुल्याकुमाराद्याः शुक्तिमत्पादसम्भवाः ।
आसां नद्य उपानद्यः सन्त्यन्याश्च सहस्रशः ॥ २,३.१४ ॥
तास्विमे कुरुपाञ्चाला मध्यदेशादयो जनाः ।
पूर्वदेशादिकाश्चैव कामरूपनिवासिनः ॥ २,३.१५ ॥
पुण्ड्राः कलिङ्गा मगधा दक्षिणाद्याश्च सर्वशः ।
तथापरान्ताः सौराष्ट्राः शूराभीरास्तथार्बुदाः ॥ २,३.१६ ॥
कारूषा मालबाश्चैव पारियात्र निवासिनः ।
सौवीराः सैन्धवा हूणाः साल्वाः कोसलवासिनाः ॥ २,३.१७ ॥
माद्रारामास्तथाम्बष्ठा पारसीकादयस्तथा ।
आसां पिबन्ति सलिलं वसन्ति सहिताः सदा ।
समीपतो महाभाग हृष्टपुष्टजनाकुलाः ॥ २,३.१८ ॥
चत्वारि भारते वर्षे युगान्यत्र महामुने ।
कृतं त्रेता द्वापरञ्च कलिश्चान्यत्र न क्वचित् ॥ २,३.१९ ॥
तपस्तप्यन्ति मुनयो जुह्वते चात्र यज्वनः ।
दानानि चात्र दीयन्ते परलोकार्थमादरात् ॥ २,३.२० ॥
पुरुषैर्यज्ञपुरुषो जम्बूद्वीपे सदेज्यते ।
यज्ञैर्यज्ञमयो विष्णुरन्यद्वीपेषु चान्यथा ॥ २,३.२१ ॥
अत्रापि भारतं श्रेष्ठं जन्बूद्वीपे महामुने ।
यतो हि कर्मभूरेषा ह्यतोन्या भोगभूमयः ॥ २,३.२२ ॥
अत्र जन्मसहस्राणां सहस्रैरपि सत्तम ।
कदाचिल्लभते जन्तुर्मानुष्यं पुण्यसंचयात् ॥ २,३.२३ ॥
गायन्ति देवाः किल गीतकानि धन्यास्तु ते भारत भूमिभागे ।
स्वर्गापवर्गास्पदमार्गभूते भवन्ति भूयः पुरुषाः सुरत्वात् ॥ २,३.२४ ॥
कर्माण्यसंकल्पिततत्फलानि संन्यस्य विष्णो परमात्म्भूते ।
अवाप्य तां कर्ममहीमनन्ते तस्मिल्लयं ये त्वमलाः प्रयान्ति ॥ २,३.२५ ॥
जानीम नैतत्क्व वयं विलीने स्वर्गप्रदे कर्मणि देहबन्धम् ।
प्राप्स्याम धन्याः खलु ते मनुष्या ये भारते नेन्द्रियविप्रहीनाः ॥ २,३.२६ ॥
नववर्षं तु मैत्रेय जम्बुद्वीपमिदं मया ।
लक्षयोजनविस्तारं संक्षेपात्कथितं तव ॥ २,३.२७ ॥
जम्बूद्वीपं समावृत्य लक्षयोजनविस्तरः ।
मैत्रेय वलयाकारः स्थितः क्षारोदधिर्बहिः ॥ २,३.२८ ॥
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेऽंशे तृतीयोध्यायः (३)
उत्तरं यत् यमुद्रस्य हिमादे शचैव दक्षिणाम् ।
वर्षं तदू भारतं नाम भारतो यत्र सन्ततिः ।। 1 ।।
नवयोजनसाहस्त्रो विस्तारोऽस्य महामुने ।
कर्म्मभूमिरियं स्वर्गमपवर्गञ्च गच्छताम् ।। 2 ।।
महेन्द्रो मलयः सह्मः शुक्तिमान् ऋक्षपर्व्वतः ।
विन्ध्यश्व पारिपात्रश्व सप्तत्र कुलपर्व्वताः ।। 3 ।।
अतः सम्प्राप्यते स्वर्गौ मुक्तिमस्मात् प्रयान्ति वै ।
तिर्य्यकूत्वं नरकञ्चापि यान्त्यतः पुरुषा मुने ।। 4 ।।
इतः स्वर्गश्व मोक्षश्व मध्यश्चान्तस्च गम्यते ।
न खल्वन्यत्र मर्त्त्यानां कर्म्म भूमौ विधीयते ।। 5 ।।
इन्द्रद्रीपः कशेरुमान् ताम्रवर्णो गभस्तिमान् ।
नगद्रीपस्तथा सौम्यो गन्धर्व्वस्त्वथ वारुणः ।। 6 ।।
अयन्तु नवमस्तैषां द्रीपः सागरसंवृतः ।
योजनानां सहस्त्रन्तु द्रीपोऽयं दक्षिणोत्तरात् ।। 7 ।।
पूर्व्वै किराता यस्य स्युः पश्चिमे यवनाः स्थिताः ।
ब्राह्मणाः क्षत्रिया वैश्या मध्ये शूद्राश्च भागशः ।। 8 ।।
इज्या-युद्ध-वाणिच्याद्यर्वैर्त्तयन्तो व्यवस्थिताः ।
शतद्रू चन्द्रभागाद्या हिमवत्पादनिर्गताः ।। 9 ।।
सेद-स्मृतिमुखाद्याश्व पारिपात्रोद्भवा मुने ।
नर्मदा सुरसाद्याश्च नद्यो विन्ध्याद्रिनिर्गताः ।। 10 ।।
तापी-पयोष्णी-निर्व्विन्ध्याप्रमुखा ऋक्षसम्भवाः ।
गोदावरी भीमरथी कृष्णवेष्णादिकास्तथा ।। 11 ।।
सह्मपादोद्भवा नद्याः स्मृताः पापभयापहाः ।
कृततमाला-ताम्रपर्णीप्रमुखा मलयोद्भवाः ।। 12 ।।
त्रिसामाचार्य्यकुल्याद्या महेन्द्रप्रभवाः स्मृताः ।
ऋषिकुल्या-कुमार्य्याद्याः शुक्तिमत्पादसम्भवाः ।। 13 ।।
आसां नद्यु पनद्यश्व सन्त्यन्याश्व सहस्त्रशः ।
तास्विमे कुरुपाञ्चाला मध्यदेशादयो जनाः ।। 14 ।।
पूर्व्वदेशादिकाश्चैव कालरूपनिवासिनः ।
पुण्ड्राः कलिङ्गा मगधा दीक्षिणात्याश्च सर्व्वशः ।। 15 ।।
तथापरान्ताः सौराष्ट्राः शूराभोरास्तथार्ब्बुदाः ।
कारूषा माल्यवांश्चैव पारिपात्रनिवासिनः ।। 16 ।।
सौवीरा-सैन्धवा हूणाः शाल्वाः शाकलवासिनः ।
मद्रारामास्तथाम्बष्ठाः पारसीकादयस्तथा ।। 17 ।।
आसां पिबन्ति सलिलं वसन्ति सरितां सदा ।
समीपतो महाभागा ह्टष्टपुष्टजनाकुलाः ।। 18 ।।
चत्वारि भारते वर्षे युगान्यत्र महामुने ।
कृतं त्रेता द्रापरश्व कलिश्चान्यत्र न क्कचित् ।। 19 ।।
तपस्तप्यन्ति मुनयो जुह्वते चात्र यज्विनः ।
दानानि चात्र दीयन्ते परलीकारत्मादरात् ।। 20 ।।
पुरुषैर्ज्ञपुरुषो जम्बूद्रीपे सदेज्यते ।
यज्ञैर्यज्ञमयो विष्णुरन्यद्रीपेषु चान्यथा ।। 21 ।।
अत्रापि भारतं श्रेष्ठं जम्बूद्वीपे महामुने ।
यतो हि कर्म्मभूरेषा ततोऽन्या भोगभूमयः ।। 22 ।।
अत्र जन्मसहस्त्राणां सहस्त्र रपि सत्तम ।
कदाचिल्लभते जन्तुर्म्मानुष्यं पुण्यसञ्चयात् ।। 23 ।।
गायन्ति देवाः किल गीतकानि धन्यास्तु ते भारतभूमिभागी ।
स्वर्गापवर्गास्पदमार्गभूते भवन्ति भूयः पुरुषाः सुरत्वात् ।। 24 ।।
कर्म्मण्यसङ्कल्पिततत्फलानि संन्यस्य विष्णौ परमात्मभूते ।
अवाप्य तां कर्म्ममहीमनन्ते तस्मिँल्लयं ये त्वमलाः प्रयानिति ।। 25 ।।
जानीम नैतत् क्क वयं विलीने स्वर्गप्रदे कर्म्मणि देहबन्धम् ।
प्राप्स्याम धन्याः कल् ते मनुष्या ये भारते नेन्द्रियविप्रहीणाः ।। 26 ।।
नववर्षं तु मैत्रेय ! जम्बूद्रीपमिदं मया ।
लक्षयोजनविस्तारं संक्षेपात् कथितं तव ।। 27 ।।
तजम्बूद्रीपं समावृत्य लक्षयोजनविस्तरः ।
मैत्रेय! वलयाकारः स्थितः क्षारोदधिर्ब्बहिः ।। 28 ।।

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. III.

Description of Bhárata-varsha: extent: chief mountains: nine divisions: principal rivers and mountains of Bhárata proper: principal nations: superiority over other Varshas, especially as the seat of religious acts. (Topographical lists.)

THE country that lies north of the ocean, and south of the snowy mountains, is called Bhárata, for there dwelt the descendants of Bharata. It is nine thousand leagues in extent 1, and is the land of works, in consequence of which men go to heaven, or obtain emancipation.

The seven main chains of mountains in Bhárata are Mahendra, Malaya, Sahya, Śuktimat, Riksha, Vindhya, and Páripátra 2.

From this region heaven is obtained, or even, in some cases, liberation

p. 175

from existence; or men pass from hence into the condition of brutes, or fall into hell. Heaven, emancipation, a state in mid-air, or in the subterraneous realms, succeeds to existence here, and the world of acts is not the title of any other portion of the universe.

The Varsha of Bhárata is divided into nine portions, which I will name to you; they are Indra-dwípa, Kaserumat, Támravarńa, Gabhastimat, Nága-dwípa, Saumya, Gandharba, and Váruńa; the last or ninth Dwípa is surrounded by the ocean, and is a thousand Yojanas from north to south 3.

On the east of Bhárata dwell the Kirátas (the barbarians); on the west, the Yavanas; in the centre reside Brahmans, Kshetriyas, Vaiśyas, and Śúdras, occupied in their respective duties of sacrifice, arms, trade, and service 4.

The Śatadru, Chandrabhágá, and other rivers, flow from the foot of

p. 176

[paragraph continues] Himálaya: the Vedasmriti and others from the Parípátra mountains: the Narmadá and Surasá from the Vindhya hills: the Tápí, Payoshńí, and Nirvindhyá from the Riksha mountains; the Godáverí, Bhimarathí, Krishńavení, and others, from the Sahya mountains: the Kritamálá, Támraparńí, and others, from the Malaya hills: the Trisámá, Rishikulyá, &c. from the Mahendra: and the Rishikulyá, Kumárí, and others, from the Śuktimat mountains. Of such as these, and of minor rivers, there is an infinite number; and many nations inhabit the countries on their borders 5.

The principal nations of Bhárata are the Kurus and Pánchálas, in the middle districts: the people of Kámarupa, in the east: the Puńd́ras,

p. 177

[paragraph continues] Kalingas, Magadhas, and southern nations, are in the south: in the extreme west are the Saurásht́ras, Śúras, Bhíras, Arbudas: the Kárushas and Málavas, dwelling along the Páripátra mountains: the Sauvíras, the Saindhavas, the Húnas, the Sálwas, the people of Śákala, the Madras, the Rámas, the Ambasht́has, and the Párasíkas, and others. These nations drink of the water of the rivers above enumerated, and inhabit their borders, happy and prosperous 6.

p. 178

In the Bhárata-varsha it is that the succession of four Yugas, or ages, the Krita, the Treta, the Dwápara, and Kali, takes place; that pious ascetics engage in rigorous penance; that devout men offer sacrifices; and that gifts are distributed; all for the sake of another world. In Jambu-dwípa, Vishńu, consisting of sacrifice, is worshipped, as the male of sacrificial rites, with sacrificial ceremonies: he is adored under other forms elsewhere. Bhárata is therefore the best of the divisions of Jambu-dwípa, because it is the land of works: the others are places of enjoyment alone. It is only after many thousand births, and the aggregation of much merit, that living beings are sometimes born in Bhárata as men. The gods themselves exclaim, "Happy are those who are born, even from the condition of gods, as men in Bhárata-varsha, as that is the way to the pleasures of Paradise, or the greater blessing of final liberation. Happy are they who, consigning all the unheeded rewards of their acts to the supreme and eternal Vishńu, obtain existence in that land of works, as their path to him. We know not, when the acts that have obtained us heaven shall have been fully recompensed 7, where we shall renew corporeal confinement; but we know that those men are fortunate who are born with perfect faculties 8 in Bhárata-varsha."

I have thus briefly described to you, Maitreya, the nine divisions of Jambu-dwípa, which is a hundred thousand Yojanas in extent, and which is encircled, as if by a bracelet, by the ocean of salt water, of similar dimensions.

Translator’s notes (8)
  1. As Bhárata-varsha means India, a nearer approach to the truth, with regard to its extent, might have been expected; and the Váyu has another measurement, which is not much above twice the actual extent, or 1000 Yojanas from Kumári (Comorin) to the source of the Ganges.

  2. These are called the Kula parvatas, family mountains, or mountain ranges or systems. They are similarly enumerated in all the authorities, and their situation may be determined with some confidence by the rivers which flow from them. Mahendra is the chain of hills that extends from Orissa and the northern Circars to Gondwana, part of which, near Ganjam, is still called Mahindra Malei, or hills of Mahindra: Malaya is the southern portion of the western Ghats: Śuktimat is doubtful, for none of its streams can be identified with any certainty: Sahya is the northern portion of the western Ghauts, the mountains of the Konkan: Riksha is the mountains of Gondwana: Vindhya is the general name of the chain that stretches across central India, but it is here restricted to the eastern division; according to the Váyu it is the part south of the Narmada, or the Sathpura range: Páripátra, as frequently written Páriyátra, is the northern and western portion of the Vindhya: the name, indeed, is still given to a range of mountains in Guzerat (see Col. Tod's map of Rajasthán), but the Chambal and other rivers of Málwa, which are said to flow from the Páriyátra mountains, do not rise in that province. All these mountains therefore belong to one system, and are connected together. The classification seems to have been known to Ptolemy, as he specifies seven ranges of mountains, although his names do not correspond, with exception of the Vindus mons: of the others, the Adisathrus and Uxentus agree nearly in position with the Páriyátra and Riksha: the Apocopi, Sardonix, Bettigo, and Orudii must be left for consideration. The Bhágavata, Váyu, Padma, and Márkańd́eya add a list of inferior mountains to these seven.

  3. This last is similarly left without a name in all the works: it is the most southerly, that on the borders of the sea, and no doubt intends India proper. Wilford places Isere a division called Kumáriká. No description is anywhere attempted of the other divisions. To these the Váyu adds six minor Dwípas, which are situated beyond sea, and are islands, Anga-dwípa, Yama-d., Matsya-d., Kumuda or Kuśa-d., Varáha-d., and Sankha-d.; peopled for the most part by Mlechchhas, but who worship Hindu divinities. The Bhágavata and Padma name eight such islands, Swarńaprastha, Chandraśukla, Avarttana, Rámańaka, Mandahára, Pánchajanya, Sinhalá, and Lanká. Col. Wilford has endeavoured to verify the first series of Upadwípas, making Varáha Europe; Kuśa, Asia Minor, &c.; Śankha, Africa; Malaya, Malacca: Yama is undetermined; and by Anga, he says, they understand China. How all this may be is more than doubtful, for in the three Puráńas in which mention is made of them, very little more is said upon the subject.

  4. By Kirátas, foresters and mountaineers are intended, the inhabitants to the present day of the mountains east of Hindustan. The Yavanas, on the west, may be either the Greeks of Bactria and the Punjab--to whom there can be little doubt the term was applied by the Hindus--or the Mohammedans, who succeeded them in a later period, and to whom it is now applied. The Váyu calls them both Mlechchhas, and also notices the admixture of barbarians with Hindus in India proper. The same passage, slightly varied, occurs in the Mahábhárata: it is said especially of the mountainous districts, and may allude therefore to the Gonds and Bhils of central India, as well as to the Mohammedans of the north-west. The specification implies that infidels and outcastes had not yet descended on the plains of Hindustan.

  5. This is a very meagre list, compared with those given in other Puráńas. That of the Váyu is translated by Col. Wilford, As. Res. vol. VIII; and much curious illustration of many of the places by the same writer occurs, As. Res. vol. XIV. The lists of the Mahábhárata, Bhágavata, and Padma are given without any arrangement: those of the Váyu, Matsya, Márkańd́eya, and Kúrma are classed as in the text. Their lists are too long for insertion in this place. Of the rivers named in the text, most are capable of verification. The Śatadru, 'the hundred channelled'--the Zaradrus of Ptolemy, Hesidrus of Pliny--is the Setlej. The Chandrabhágá, Sandabalis, or Acesines, is the Chinab. The Vedasmriti in the Váyu and Kúrma is classed with the Vetravatí or Betwa, the Charmanwati or Chambal, and Siprá and Párá, rivers of Malwa, and may be the same with the Beos of the maps. The Narmadá or Narbadda, the Namadus of Ptolemy, is well known; according to the Váyu it rises, not in the Vindhya, but in the Riksha mountains, taking its origin in fact in Gondwana. The Surasá is uncertain. The Tápí is the Tápti, rising also in Gondwana: the other two are not identified. The Godaveri preserves its name: in the other two we have the Beemah and the Krishńa. For Kritamálá the Kúrma reads Ritumálá, but neither is verified. The Támraparní is in Tinivelly, and rises at the southern extremity of the western Ghats. The Rishikulyá, that rises in the Mahendra mountain, is the Rasikulia or Rasíkoila, which flows into the sea near Ganjam. The Trisámá is undetermined. The text assigns another Rishikulyá to the Śuktimat mountains, but in all the other authorities the word is Rishíka. The Kumárí might suggest some connexion with Cape Comorin, but that the Malaya mountains seem to extend to the extreme south. A Rishikulyá river is mentioned (Vana P. v. 3026) as a Tírtha in the Mahábhárata, in connexion apparently with the hermitage of Vaśisht́ha, which in another passage (v. 4096) is said to be on mount Arbuda or Abu. In that case, and if the reading of the text be admitted for the name of the river, the Śuktimat range would be the mountains of Guzerat; but this is doubtful.

  6. The list of nations is as scanty as that of the rivers: it is, however, omitted altogether in the Bhágavata. The Padma has a long catalogue, but without arrangement; so has the Mahábhárata. The lists of the Váyu, Matsya, and Márkańd́eya class the nations as central, northern, eastern, southern, and western. The names are much the same in all, and are given in the 8th vol. of the As. Res. from the Brahmáńd́a, or, for it is the same account, the Váyu. The Márkańd́eya has a second classification, and, comparing Bhárata-varsha to a tortoise, with its head to the east, enumerates the countries in the head, tail, flanks, and feet of the animal. It will be sufficient here to attempt an identification of the names in the text, but some further illustration is offered at the end of the chapter. The Kurus are the people of Kurukshetra, or the upper part of the Doab, about Delhi. The Pánchálas, it appears from the Mahábhárata, occupied the lower part of the Doab, extending across the Jumna to the Chambal. Kullúka Bhat́t́a, in his commentary on Manu, II. 59, places them at Kanoj. Kámarupa is the north-eastern part of Bengal, and western portion of Asam. Puńd́ra is Bengal proper, with part of south Behar and the Jungle Mahals. Kalinga is the sea-coast west of the mouths of the Ganges, with the upper part of the Coromandel coast. Magadhá is Behar. The Saurásht́ras are the people of Surat, the Surastrene of Ptolemy. The Śúras and Bhíras, in the same direction, may be the Suri and Phauni or Phryni of Strabo. The Arbudas must be the people about mount Abu, or the natives of Mewar. The Kárushas and Málavas are of course the people of Malwa. The Sauvíras and Saindhavas are usually conjoined as the Sindhu-Sauvíras, and must be the nations of Sindh and western Rajputána. By the Minas we are to understand the white Huns or Indo-Scythians, who were established in the Punjab and along the Indus at the commencement of our era, as we know from Arrian, Strabo, and Ptolemy, confirmed by recent discoveries of their coins, The Śálwas or, as also read, Śályas are placed by the Váyu and Matsya amongst the central nations, and seem to have occupied part of Rájasthan, a Śálwa Rája being elsewhere described as engaging in hostilities with the people of Dwaraká in Guzerat. Śákala, as I have elsewhere noticed, is a city in the Punjab (As. Res. XV. 108), the Sagala of Ptolemy (ibid. 107); the Mahábhárata makes it the capital of the Madras, the Mardi of the ancients; but they are separately named in the text, and were situated something more to the south-east. p. 178 The Rámas and Ambasht́has are not named in the other Puráńas, but the latter are amongst the western, or more properly north-western nations subjugated by Nakula, in his Dig-vijaya. Mahábh. Sabhá P. Ambas and Ambasht́has are included in the list extracted by Col. Wilford from the Varáha Sanhitá, and the latter are supposed by him to be the Ambastæ of Arrian. The Párasíkas carry us into Persia, or that part of it adjoining to the Indus. As far as the enumeration of the text extends, it seems applicable to the political and geographical divisions of India about the era of Christianity.

  7. Enjoyment in Swarga, like punishment in Naraka, is only for a certain period, according to the merit or demerit of the individual. When the account is balanced, the man is born again amongst mankind.

  8. A crippled or mutilated person, or one whose organs are defective, cannot at once obtain liberation; his merits must first secure his being born again perfect and entire.

II.4Book II, Chapter 4 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीपराशर उवाच
क्षारोदेन यथा द्वीपो जम्बूसंज्ञोऽभिवेष्टितः ।
संवेष्ट्य क्षारमुदधिं प्लक्षद्वीपस्तथा स्थितः ॥ २,४.१ ॥
जम्बूद्वीपस्य विस्तारः शतसाहस्रसंमितः ।
स एवं द्विगुणो ब्रह्मन् प्लक्षद्वीप उदाहृतः ॥ २,४.२ ॥
सप्त मेधातिथेः पुत्राः प्लक्षद्वीपेश्वरस्य वै ।
ज्येष्ठ शान्तहयो नाम शिशिरस्तदनन्तरः ॥ २,४.३ ॥
सुखोदयस्तथानन्दः शिवः क्षेमक एव च ।
ध्रुवश्च सप्तमस्तेषां प्लक्षद्वीपेश्वरा हि ते ॥ २,४.४ ॥
पूर्वं शान्तहयं वर्षं शिशिरं च सुखं तथा ।
आनन्दं च शिवं चैव क्षेमकं ध्रुवमेव च ॥ २,४.५ ॥
मर्यादाकारकास्तेषां तथान्ये वर्षपर्वताः ।
सप्तैव तेषां नामानि शृणुष्व मुनिसत्तम ॥ २,४.६ ॥
गोमदेश्चैव चन्द्रश्च नारदौ दुन्दुभिस्तथा ।
सोमकः मुमनाश्चैव वैभ्राजश्चैव सप्तमः ॥ २,४.७ ॥
वर्षाचलेषु रम्येषु वर्षेष्वेतेषु चानघाः ।
वसंति देवगन्धर्वसहिताः सततं प्रजाः ॥ २,४.८ ॥
तेषु पुण्या जनपदाश्चिराच्च म्रियते जनः ।
नाधयो व्याधयो वापि सर्वकालसुखं हि तत् ॥ २,४.९ ॥
तेषां नद्यस्तु सप्तैव वर्षाणां च समुद्रगाः ।
नामतस्ताः प्रवक्ष्यामि श्रुताः पापं हरन्ति याः ॥ २,४.१० ॥
अनुतप्ता शिखी चैव विपाशा त्रिदिवाक्लमः ।
अमृता सुकृता चैव सप्तैतास्तत्र निम्नगाः ॥ २,४.११ ॥
एते शैलास्तथा नद्यः प्रधानाः कथितास्तव ।
क्षुद्रशैलास्तथा नद्यस्तत्र सन्ति सहस्रशः ।
ताः पिबन्दि सदाहृष्टा नदीर्जनपदास्तुते ॥ २,४.१२ ॥
अपसर्पिणी न तेषां वै न चैवोत्सर्पिणी द्विज ।
न त्वेवास्ति युगावस्था तेषु स्तानेषु सप्तसु ॥ २,४.१३ ॥
त्रेतायुगसमः कालः सर्वदैव महामते ।
प्लक्षद्वीपादिषु ब्रह्मञ्शाकद्वीपान्तिकेषु वै ॥ २,४.१४ ॥
पञ्च वर्षसहस्राणि जना जीवन्त्यनामयाः ।
धर्मः पञ्चस्वथैतेषु वर्णाश्रमविभागशः ॥ २,४.१५ ॥
वर्णाश्च तत्र चत्वारस्तान्निबोध वदामि ते ॥ २,४.१६ ॥
आर्यकाः कुरारश्चैव विदिश्या भाविनश्चे ते ।
विप्रक्षत्रिवैश्यास्ते शूद्राश्च मुनिसत्तम ॥ २,४.१७ ॥
ज्मबूवृक्षप्रमाणस्तु तन्मध्ये सुमहांस्तरुः ।
प्लक्षस्तन्नामसंज्ञोयं प्लक्षद्वीपो द्विजोत्तम ॥ २,४.१८ ॥
इज्यते तत्र भगवांस्तैर्वर्णैरार्यकादिभिः ।
सीमरूपि जगत्स्त्रष्टा सर्वः सर्वेश्वरो हरिः ॥ २,४.१९ ॥
प्लक्षद्वीपप्रमाणेन प्लक्षद्वीपः समावृतः ।
तथैवेक्षुरमोदेन परिवेषानुकारिणा ॥ २,४.२० ॥
इत्येवं तव मैत्रेय प्लक्षद्वीप उदाहृतः ।
संक्षेपेण मया भूयः शाल्मलं मे निसामय ॥ २,४.२१ ॥
शाल्ममस्येश्वरोःवीरो वपुष्मांस्तत्सुताञ्छृणु ।
तेषां तु नामसंज्ञानि सप्तवर्षाणि तानि वै ॥ २,४.२२ ॥
श्वेतोथ हरितश्चैव जीमूतो रोहितस्तथा ।
वैद्युतो मानसश्चैव सुप्रभश्च महामुने ॥ २,४.२३ ॥
शाल्मलेन समुद्रोसौ द्वीपेनेक्षुरसोदकः ।
विस्तारद्विगुणेनाथ सर्वतः संवृतः स्थितः ॥ २,४.२४ ॥
तत्रापि पर्वताः सप्त विज्ञेया रत्नयोनयः ।
वर्षाभिव्यञ्जका ये तु तथा सप्त च निम्नगाः ॥ २,४.२५ ॥
कुमुदश्चेन्नतश्चैव तृतीयश्च बलाहकः ।
द्रोणो यत्र महौषध्यः स चतुर्थो महीधरः ॥ २,४.२६ ॥
कङ्कस्तुपञ्चमः षष्ठी महिषः सप्तमस्तथा ।
ककुद्मान्पर्वतवरः सरिन्नामानि मे शृणु ॥ २,४.२७ ॥
योनितोयो वितृष्णा च चन्द्रा मुक्ता विमोचनी ।
निवृत्तिः सप्तमी तासां स्मृतास्ताः पापशान्तिदाः ॥ २,४.२८ ॥
श्वेतञ्च हरितं चैव वैद्युतं मानसं तथा ।
जीमूतं रोहितं चैव सुप्रभं चापि शोभनम् ।
सप्तैतानि तु वर्षाणि चातुर्वर्ण्ययुतानि वै ॥ २,४.२९ ॥
शाल्मले ये तु वर्णाश्च वसन्त्येते महामुने ।
कपिलाश्चारुणाः पीताः कृष्णाश्चैव पृथक्पृथक् ॥ २,४.३० ॥
ब्रह्मणाः क्षत्रया वैश्याः शुद्राश्चैव यजन्तितम् ।
भगवन्तं समस्तस्य विष्णुमात्मानमव्ययम् ।
वायुभूतं मखश्रेष्ठैर्यज्वनो यज्ञसंस्थितिम् ॥ २,४.३१ ॥
देवानामत्र सान्नध्यमतीव सुमनोहरे ।
शाल्मलिः सुमहान्वृक्षो नाम्ना निर्वृतिकारकः ॥ २,४.३२ ॥
एष द्वीपः समुद्रेण सुरोदेन समावृतः ।
विस्ताराच्छाल्मलस्यैव समेन तु समन्ततः ॥ २,४.३३ ॥
सुरोदकः परिवृतः कुशद्वीपेन सर्वतः ।
शाल्मलस्य तु विस्तराद्द्विगुणेन समन्ततः ॥ २,४.३४ ॥
ज्योतिष्मतः कुशद्वीपे सप्त पुत्राञ्छृणुष्व तान् ॥ २,४.३५ ॥
उद्भिदो वेणुमांश्चैव वेरथो लम्बनो धृतिः ।
प्रभाकरोतिकपिलस्तन्नामा वर्षपद्धतिः ॥ २,४.३६ ॥
तस्मिन्वसन्ति मनुजाः सह दैते यदानवैः ।
तथैव देवगन्धर्वयक्षकिंपुरुषादयः ॥ २,४.३७ ॥
वर्णास्तत्रापि चत्वारो निजानुष्ठानतत्पराः ।
दमिनः शुष्मिणः स्नेहा मन्देहाश्च महामुने ॥ २,४.३८ ॥
ब्रह्मणाः क्षत्रिया वैश्याः शूद्राश्चानुक्रमोदिताः ॥ २,४.३९ ॥
यथोस्ककर्मकर्तृत्वात्स्वाधिकारोक्षयाय ते ।
तत्रैव तं कुशद्वीपे ब्रह्मरूपं जनार्दनम् ।
यजन्तः क्षपयन्त्युग्रमधिकारफलप्रदम् ॥ २,४.४० ॥
विद्रुमो हेमशैलश्च द्यतिमान् पुष्पवांस्तथा ।
कुशशयो हरिश्चैव सप्तमो मन्दराचलः ॥ २,४.४१ ॥
वर्षाचलास्तु सप्तैते तत्र द्वीपे महामुने ।
नद्यश्च सप्त तासां तु शृणु नामान्यनुक्रमात् ॥ २,४.४२ ॥
धूतपापा शिवा चैव पवित्रा संमतिस्तथा ।
विद्युदम्भा मही चान्या सर्वपाप हरास्त्विमाः ॥ २,४.४३ ॥
अन्याः सहस्रशस्तत्र क्षुद्रनद्यस्तथाचलाः ।
कुशद्वीपे गुशस्तम्बः संज्ञया तस्य तत्स्मृतम् ॥ २,४.४४ ॥
तत्प्रमाणेन स द्वीपो घृतोदेन समावृतः ।
घृतोदश्च समुद्रो वै क्रौञ्चद्वीपेन संवृतः ॥ २,४.४५ ॥
क्रौञ्चद्वीपो महाभाग श्रुयताञ्चापरो महान् ।
कुशद्वीपस्य विस्तारा द्द्विगुणो यस्य विस्तरः ॥ २,४.४६ ॥
क्रौञ्चद्वीपे द्युतिमतः पुत्रास्तस्य महात्मनः ।
तन्नामानि च वर्षाणि तेषां चक्रे महीपतिः ॥ २,४.४७ ॥
कुशलो मल्लगश्चोष्णः पीवरोथान्धकारकः ।
मुनिश्च दुन्दुभिश्चैव सप्तैते तत्सुता मुने ॥ २,४.४८ ॥
तत्रापि देवगन्धर्वसेविताः सुमनोहराः ।
वर्षाचला महाबुद्धे तेषां नामानि मे शृणु ॥ २,४.४९ ॥
क्रौञ्चश्च वामनश्चैव तृतीयश्चान्धकारकः ।
चतुर्थो रत्नशैलश्च स्वाहिनी हयसन्निभः ॥ २,४.५० ॥
दिवावृत्पञ्चमश्चात्र तथान्यः पुण्डरीकवान् ।
दुन्दुभिश्च महाशैलो द्विगुणास्त परस्परम् ।
द्वीपाद्वीपेषु ये शैला यथा द्वीपानि ते तथा ॥ २,४.५१ ॥
वर्षेष्वेतेषु रम्येषु तथा शैलवरेषु च ।
निवसंति निरातङ्काः सह देवगणैः प्रजाः ॥ २,४.५२ ॥
पुष्कराः पुष्कला धन्यास्तिष्याख्याश्च महामुने ।
ब्राह्मणाः क्षत्रिया वैश्याः शुद्राश्चानुक्रमोदिताः ॥ २,४.५३ ॥
नदीर्मैत्रेय ते तत्र याः पिबन्ति शृणुष्व ताः ।
सप्तप्रधानाः शतशस्तत्रान्याः क्षुद्रनिम्नगाः ॥ २,४.५४ ॥
गौरी कुमुद्वती चैव सन्ध्या रात्रिर्मनोजवा ।
क्षान्तिश्च पुण्डरीका च सप्तैता वर्षनिम्नगाः ॥ २,४.५५ ॥
तत्रापि विष्णुर्भगवान्पुष्काराद्यैर्जानार्दनः ।
यागौ रुद्रस्वरूपश्च इज्यते यज्ञसन्निधौ ॥ २,४.५६ ॥
क्रौञ्चद्वीपः समुद्रेण दधिमण्डोदकेन च ।
आवृतः सर्वतः क्रौञ्च द्वीपतुल्येन मानतः ॥ २,४.५७ ॥
दधिमण्डोदकश्चापि शाकद्वीपेन संवृतः ।
क्रौञ्चद्वीपस्य विस्ताराद्द्विगुणेन महामुने ॥ २,४.५८ ॥
शाकद्वीपेश्वरस्यापि भव्यस्य मुमहात्मनः ।
सप्तैव तनयास्तषां ददौ वर्षाणि सप्त सः ॥ २,४.५९ ॥
जलदश्च कुमारश्च मुकुमारो मरीचकः ।
कुसुमोदश्च मौदाकिः सप्तमश्च महाद्रुमः ॥ २,४.६० ॥
तत्संज्ञान्येव तत्रापि सप्त वर्षाण्यनुक्रमात् ।
तत्रापि पर्वताः स्पत वर्षविच्छेदकारिणः ॥ २,४.६१ ॥
पूर्वस्तत्रोदयगिरिर्जलाधारस्तथापरः ।
तथा रैवतकः श्यामस्तथैवास्तगिरिर्द्विज ।
आम्बिकेयस्तथा रम्यः केसरी पर्वतोत्तमः ॥ २,४.६२ ॥
शाकस्तत्र महावृक्षः सिद्धगन्धर्वसेवितः ।
यत्रत्यवातसंस्पार्शादाह्लादो जायते परः ॥ २,४.६३ ॥
तत्र पुण्या जनपदाश्चातुर्वर्ण्यसमन्विताः ।
नद्यश्चात्र महापुण्याः सर्वपापभयापहाः ॥ २,४.६४ ॥
सुकुमारी कुमारी च नलिनी धेनुका च या ।
इक्षुश्च वेणुका चैव गभस्ती सप्तमी तथा ॥ २,४.६५ ॥
अन्याश्च शतशस्तत्र क्षुद्रनद्यो महामुने ।
महीधरास्तथा सन्ति शतशोथ सहस्रशः ॥ २,४.६६ ॥
ताः पिबन्ति मुदायुक्ता जलदादिषु ये स्थिताः ।
वर्षषु ते जनपदाः स्वर्गादभ्येत्य मेदिनीम् ॥ २,४.६७ ॥
धर्महानिर्न तेष्वस्ति न संघर्षः परस्परम् ।
मर्यादाव्युत्क्रमो नापि तेषु देशेषु सप्तसु ॥ २,४.६८ ॥
वङ्गाश्च मागधाश्चैव मानसा मन्दगास्तथा ।
वङ्गा ब्रह्मणभूयिष्ठा मागधाः क्षत्रियास्तथा ।
वैश्यास्तु मानसास्तेषां शूद्रस्तेषां तु मन्दगाः ॥ २,४.६९ ॥
शाकद्वीपे तु तैर्विष्णुः सूर्यरूपधरो मुने ।
यथोक्तौरिज्यते सम्यक्कर्मभिर्नियतात्मभिः ॥ २,४.७० ॥
शाकद्वीपस्तु मैत्रेय क्षीरोदेन समावृतः ।
शाकद्वीपप्रमाणेन वलयेनेव वेष्टितः ॥ २,४.७१ ॥
क्षीराब्धिः सर्वतो ब्रह्मन्पुष्कराख्येन वेष्टितः ।
द्वीपेन शाकद्वीपात्तु द्विगुणेन समन्ततः ॥ २,४.७२ ॥
पुष्करे सवनस्यापि महावीरोऽभवत्सुतः ।
धातुकिश्च तयोस्तत्र द्वे वर्षे नामचिह्निते ।
महावीरं तथैवान्यद्धातुकीखण्डसंज्ञितम् ॥ २,४.७३ ॥
एकश्चत्र महाभाग प्रख्यातो वर्षपर्वतः ।
मानासोत्तरसंज्ञो वै मध्यतो वलयाकृतिः ॥ २,४.७४ ॥
योजनानां सहस्राणि ऊर्ध्वं पञ्चाशदुच्छ्रितः ।
तावदेव च विस्तीर्णः सर्वतः परिमण्डलः ॥ २,४.७५ ॥
पुष्करद्वीपवलयं मध्येन विभजन्निव ।
स्थितोसौ तेन विछिन्नं जातं तद्वर्षकद्वयम् ॥ २,४.७६ ॥
वलयाकारमेकैकं तयोर्वर्षं तथा गिरिः ॥ २,४.७७ ॥
दशवर्षसहस्राणि तत्र जीवन्ति मानवाः ।
विरामया विशोकाश्च रागद्वेषादिवर्जिताः ॥ २,४.७८ ॥
अधमोत्तमौ न तेष्वास्तां न वध्यवधकौ द्विज ।
नेर्ष्यासूया भयं द्वेषो दोषो लोभादिको न च ॥ २,४.७९ ॥
महापीतंबहिर्वर्षं धातकीखण्डमन्ततः ।
मानसोत्तरशौलस्य देवदैत्यादिसेवितम् ॥ २,४.८० ॥
सत्यानृतेन तत्रास्तां द्वीपे पुष्करसंज्ञिते ।
न तत्र नद्यः शैला वा द्वीपे वर्षद्वयान्विते ॥ २,४.८१ ॥
तुल्यपेषास्तु मनुजा देवास्तत्रैकरूपिणः ॥ २,४.८२ ॥
वर्णाश्रमाचारहीनं धर्माचरणवर्जितम् ।
त्रयीवार्तादण्डनीतिशुश्रूषारहितञ्च यत् ॥ २,४.८३ ॥
वर्षद्वयं तु मैत्रेय भौमः स्वर्गोयमुत्तमः ।
सर्वर्तुसुखदः कालो जरारोगादिवर्जितः ।
धातकीखण्डसंज्ञेऽथ महावीरे च वै मुने ॥ २,४.८४ ॥
न्यग्रोधः पुष्करद्वीपे ब्रह्मणः स्थानमुत्तमम् ।
तस्मिन्नवसति ब्रह्मा पूज्यमानः सुरासुरैः ॥ २,४.८५ ॥
स्वादूदकेनोदधिना पुष्करः परिवेष्टितः ।
समेन पुष्करस्यैव विस्तारान्मण्डलं तथा ॥ २,४.८६ ॥
एवं द्वीपाः समुद्रैश्च सप्तसप्तभिरावृताः ।
द्वीपश्चैव समुद्रश्च समानो द्विगुणौ परौ ॥ २,४.८७ ॥
पयांसि सर्वदा सर्वसमुद्रेषु समानि वै ।
न्यूनातिरिक्तता तेषां कदाचिन्नैव जायते ॥ २,४.८८ ॥
स्थालीस्थमग्नीसंयोगादुद्रेकिसलिले यथ ।
तथेन्दुवृद्धौ सलिलमंभोधौ मुनिसत्तम ॥ २,४.८९ ॥
अन्यूनानतिरिक्ताश्च वर्धन्त्यापो ह्रसंति च ।
उदयास्तमनेष्विन्दोः पक्षयोः शुक्लकृष्णयोः ॥ २,४.९० ॥
दशोत्तराणि पञ्चैव ह्यङ्गुलानां शतानि वै ।
अपां वृद्धिक्षणो दृष्टौ सामुद्रीणां महामुने ॥ २,४.९१ ॥
भोजनं पुष्करद्वीपे तत्र स्वयमुपस्थितम् ।
षड्रसं भुञ्जते विप्र प्रजाः सर्वाः सदैव हि ॥ २,४.९२ ॥
स्वादूदकस्य परितो दृस्यते लोकसंस्थितिः ।
द्विगुणा काञ्चनी भूमिः सर्वजन्तुविवर्जिता ॥ २,४.९३ ॥
लोकालोकस्ततः शैलो जोजनायुतविस्तृतः ।
उच्छ्रायेणापि तावन्ति सहस्राण्यचलो हि सः ॥ २,४.९४ ॥
ततस्तमः समावृत्य तं शौलं सर्वतः स्थितम् ।
तमश्चाण्डकटाहेन समन्तात्परिवेष्टितम् ॥ २,४.९५ ॥
पञ्चशत्कोटिविस्तारा सेयमुर्व महामुने ।
सहैवाण्डकटाहेन सद्वीपाब्धिमहीधरा ॥ २,४.९६ ॥
सेयं धात्री विधात्री च सर्वभूतगुणाधिका ।
आधारभू६ आ सर्वेषां मैत्रेय जगतामिति ॥ २,४.९७ ॥
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेऽंशे चतुर्थोऽध्यायः (४)

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. IV.

Account of kings, divisions, mountains, rivers, and inhabitants of the other Dwípas, viz. Plaksha, Śálmala, Kuśa, Krauncha, Śáka, and Pushkara: of the oceans separating them: of the tides: of the confines of the earth: the Lokáloka mountain. Extent of the whole.

IN the same manner as Jambu-dwípa is girt round about by the ocean of salt water, so that ocean is surrounded by the insular continent of Plaksha; the extent of which is twice that of Jambu-dwípa.

Medhatithi, who was made sovereign of Plaksha, had seven sons, Śántabhaya, Śiśira, Sukhodaya, Ánanda, Śiva, Kshemaka, and Dhruva; and the Dwípa was divided amongst them, and each division was named after the prince to whom it was subject. The several kingdoms were bounded by as many ranges of mountains, named severally Gomeda, Chandra, Nárada, Dundubhi, Somaka, Sumanas, and Vaibhrája. In these mountains the sinless inhabitants ever dwell along with celestial spirits and gods: in them are many holy places; and the people there live for a long period, exempt from care and pain, and enjoying uninterrupted felicity. There are also, in the seven divisions of Plaksha, seven rivers, flowing to the sea, whose names alone are sufficient to take away sin: they are the Anutaptá, Śikhí, Vipásá, Tridivá, Kramu, Amritá, and Sukritá. These are the chief rivers and mountains of Plaksha-dwípa, which I have enumerated to you; but there are thousands of others of inferior magnitude. The people who drink of the waters of those rivers are always contented and happy, and there is neither decrease nor increase amongst them 1, neither are the revolutions of the four ages known in these Varshas: the character of the time is there uniformly that of

p. 198

the Treta (or silver) age. In the five Dwípas, worthy Brahman, from Plaksha to Śáka, the length of life is five thousand years, and religious merit is divided amongst the several castes and orders of the people. The castes are called Áryaka, Kuru, Vivása, and Bháví, corresponding severally with Brahman, Kshetriya, Vaiśya, and Śúdra. In this Dwípa is a large fig-tree (F. religiosa), of similar size as the Jambu-tree of Jambu-dwípa; and this Dwípa is called Plaksha, after the name of the tree. Hari, who is all, and the creator of all, is worshipped in this continent in the form of Soma (the moon). Plaksha-dwípa is surrounded, as by a disc, by the sea of molasses, of the same extent as the land. Such, Maitreya, is a brief description of Plaksha-dwípa.

The hero Vapushmat was king of the next or Śálmala-dwípa, whose seven sons also gave designations to seven Varshas, or divisions. Their names were Śweta, Háríta, Jímúta, Rohita, Vaidyuta, Mánasa, and Suprabha. The Ikshu sea is encompassed by the continent of Sálmala, which is twice its extent. There are seven principal mountain ranges, abounding in precious gems, and dividing the Varshas from each other; and there are also seven chief rivers. The mountains are called Kumuda, Unnata, Valáhaka, Drona, fertile in medicinal herbs, Kanka, Mahisha, and Kakkudwat. The rivers are Yauní, Toyá, Vitrishńá, Chandrá, Śuklá, Vimochaní, and Nivritti; all whose waters cleanse away sins. The Brahmans, Kshetriyas, Vaiśyas, and Śúdras of this Dwípa, called severally Kapilas, Arunas, Pítas, and Rohitas (or tawny, purple, yellow, and red), worship the imperishable soul of all things, Vishńu, in the form of Váyu (wind), with pious rites, and enjoy frequent association with the gods. A large Śálmalí (silk-cotton) tree grows in this Dwípa, and gives it its name. The Dwípa is surrounded by the Surá sea (sea of wine), of the same extent as itself.

The Surá sea is entirely encircled by Kuśa-dwípa, which is every way twice the size of the preceding continent. The king, Jyotishmat, had seven sons, Udbhida, Venumán, Swairatha, Lavana, Dhriti, Prabhákara, and Kapila, after whom the seven portions or Varshas of the island were called Udbhida, &c. There reside mankind along with Daityas and Dánavas, as well as with spirits of heaven and gods. The four

p. 199

castes, assiduously devoted to their respective duties, are termed Dámís, Śushmis, Snehas, and Mandehas, who, in order to be relieved of the obligations imposed upon them in the discharge of their several functions, worship Janárddana, in the form of Brahmá, and thus get rid of the unpleasant duties which lead to temporal rewards. The seven principal mountains in this Dwípa are named Vidruma, Hemaśaila, Dyutimán, Pushpaván, Kuśeśaya, Hari, and Mandara; and the seven rivers are Dhútapápá, Śiva, Pavitrá, Sammati, Vidyudambhá, Mahhvanyá, Sarvapápahará: besides these, there are numerous rivers and mountains of less importance. Kuśa-dwípa is so named from a clump of Kuśa grass (Poa) growing there. It is surrounded by the Ghrita sea (the sea of butter), of the same size as the continent.

The sea of Ghrita is encompassed by Krauncha-dwípa, which is twice as large as Kuśa-dwípa. The king of this Dwípa was Dyutimán, whose sons, and the seven Varshas named after them, were Kuśala, Mallaga, Ushńa, Pívara, Andhakáraka, Muni, and Dundubhi. The seven boundary mountains, pleasing to gods and celestial spirits, are Krauncha, Vámana, Andhakáraka, Devavrit, Puńd́aríkaván, Dundubhi, and Mahaśaila; each of which is in succession twice as lofty as the series that precedes it, in the same manner as each Dwípa is twice as extensive as the one before it. The inhabitants reside there without apprehension, associating with the bands of divinities. The Brahmans are called Pushkaras; the Kshetriyas, Pushkalas: the Vaiśyas are termed Dhanyas; and the Śúdras, Tishyas. They drink of countless streams, of which the principal are denominated Gaurí, Kumudwatí, Sandhyá, Rátri, Manojavá, Kshánti, and Puńd́aríká. The divine Vishńu, the protector of mankind, is worshipped there by the people, with holy rites, in the form of Rudra. Krauncha is surrounded by the sea of curds, of a similar extent; and that again is encompassed by Śáka-dwípa.

The sons of Bhavya, the king of Śáka-dwípa, after whom its Varshas were denominated, were Jalada, Kumára, Sukumára, Maníchaka, Kusumoda, Maudákí, and Mahádruma. The seven mountains separating the countries were Udayagiri, Jaládhára, Raivataka, Śyáma, Ámbikeya, Ramya, and Keśarí. There grows a large Sáka (Teak) tree, frequented

p. 200

by the Siddhas and Gandharbas, the wind from which, as produced by its fluttering leaves, diffuses delight. The sacred lands of this continent are peopled by the four castes. Its seven holy rivers, that wash away all sin, are the Sukumárí, Kumárí, Naliní, Dhenuká, Ikshu, Venuká, and Gabhastí. There are also hundreds and thousands of minor streams and mountains in this Dwípa: and the inhabitants of Jalada and the other divisions drink of those waters with pleasure, after they have returned to earth from Indra's heaven. In those seven districts there is no dereliction of virtue; there is no contention; there is no deviation from rectitude. The caste of Mriga is that of the Brahman; the Mágadha, of the Kshetriya; the Mánasa, of the Vaiśya; and the Mandaga of the Śúdra: and by these Vishńu is devoutly worshipped as the sun, with appropriate ceremonies. Śáka-dwípa is encircled by the sea of milk, as by an armlet, and the sea is of the same breadth as the continent which it embraces 2

The Kshíroda ocean (or sea of milk) is encompassed by the seventh Dwípa, or Pushkara, which is twice the size of Sáka-dwípa. Savana, who was made its sovereign, had but two sons, Mahávíra and Dhátakí, after whom the two Varshas of Pushkara were so named. These are divided by one mighty range of mountains, called Mánasottara, which runs in a circular direction (forming an outer and an inner circle). This mountain is fifty thousand Yojanas in height, and as many in its breadth; dividing the Dwípa in the middle, as if with a bracelet, into two divisions, which are also of a circular form, like the mountain that separates them. Of these two, the Mahávíra-varsha is exterior to the circumference of Mánasottara, and Dhátakí lies within the circle; and both are frequented by heavenly spirits and gods. There are no other mountains in Pushkara, neither are there any rivers 3. Men in this Dwípa live a thousand years, free from sickness and sorrow, and unruffled by anger or affection.

p. 201

[paragraph continues] There is neither virtue nor vice, killer nor slain: there is no jealousy, envy, fear, hatred, covetousness, nor any moral defect: neither is there truth or falsehood. Food is spontaneously produced there, and all the inhabitants feed upon viands of every flavour. Men there are indeed of the same nature with gods, and of the same form and habits. There is no distinction of caste or order; there are no fixed institutes; nor are rites performed for the sake of advantage. The three Vedas, the Puráńas, ethics, and polity, and the laws of service, are unknown. Pushkara is in fact, in both its divisions, a terrestrial paradise, where time yields happiness to all its inhabitants, who are exempt from sickness and decay. A Nyagrodha-tree (Ficus indica) grows on this Dwípa, which is the especial abode of Brahmá, and he resides in it, adored by the gods and demons. Pushkara is surrounded by the sea of fresh water, which is of equal extent with the continent it invests 4.

In this manner the seven island continents are encompassed successively by the seven oceans, and each ocean and continent is respectively of twice the extent of that which precedes it. In all the oceans the water remains at all times the same in quantity, and never, increases or diminishes; but like the water in a caldron, which, in consequence of

p. 202

its combination with heat, expands, so the waters of the ocean swell with the increase of the moon. The waters, although really neither more nor less, dilate or contract as the moon increases or wanes in the light and dark fortnights. The rise and fall of the waters of the different seas is five hundred and ten inches 5.

Beyond the sea of fresh water is a region of twice its extent, where the land is of gold, and where no living beings reside. Thence extends the Lokáloka mountain, which is ten thousand Yojanas in breadth, and as many in height; and beyond it perpetual darkness invests the mountain all around; which darkness is again encompassed by the shell of the egg 6.

Such, Maitreya, is the earth, which with its continents, mountains, oceans, and exterior shell, is fifty crores (five hundred millions) of

p. 203

[paragraph continues] Yojanas in extent 7. It is the mother and nurse of all creatures, the foundation of all worlds, and the chief of the elements.

Translator’s notes (7)
  1. So the commentator explains the terms Avasarpińí and Utsarpińí; but these words most commonly designate divisions of time peculiar to the Jainas; during the former of which men are supposed to decline from extreme felicity to extreme distress; and in the latter, to ascend from misery to happiness. The author of the text had possibly the Jaina use of these terms in view; and if so, wrote after their system was promulgated.

  2. The Kúrma is the only Puráńa in which the white island, Śweta-dwípa, the abode of Vishńu, is included in the geography of the world: an incidental description of it is quoted by Col. Wilford from the Uttara Khańd́a of the Padma Puráńa (As. Res. XI. 99); and it is in this and in the Brahma Vaivartta that allusions to it are most frequent and copious.

  3. A slight alteration has been here made in the order of the description.

  4. The description of the Dwípas in the Agni, Bráhma, Kúrma, and Váyu Puráńas agrees with that of our text. The Márkańd́eya, Linga, and Matsya contain no details. The Bhágavata and Padma follow the same order as the Vishńu, &c. but alter all the names, and, many of the measurements. The account of the Mahábhárata is very irregular and confused. The variations throw no additional light upon the geographical system of the Puráńas. Some traces of this appear discoverable in the west; and the seven Dwípas, with their surrounding seas, may have some connexion with the notion of the seven climates, as Col. Wilford has supposed. That learned, but fanciful writer bestowed great pains upon the verification of these fictions, and imagined the different Dwípas to represent actual divisions of the globe: Jambu being India; Kuśa, the Kush of Scripture, or the countries between Mesopotamia and India: Plaksha being Asia Minor; Śálmali, eastern Europe; Krauncha, Germany; Śáka, the British isles; and Pushkara, Iceland. The white or silver island, or island of the moon, was also, according to him, the island of Great Britain. Whatever may be thought of his conclusions, his essays on these subjects, particularly in the eighth, tenth, and eleventh volumes of the Asiatic Researches, contain much curious and interesting matter.

  5. Although the Hindus seem to have had a notion of the cause of the tides, they were not very accurate observers of the effect. The extreme rise of the tide in the Hugli river has never exceeded twenty feet, and its average is about fifteen. (As. Res. vol. XVIII. Kyd on the Tides of the Hugli.)

  6. The Ańd́a kat́áha. The Kat́áha is properly a shallow hemispherical vessel, a saucer; but compounded in this form, implies the shell of the mundane egg. The Bhágavata thus describes these portions of the world: "Beyond the sea of fresh water is the mountain belt, called Lokáloka, the circular boundary between the world and void space. The interval between Meru and Mánasottara is the land of living beings. Beyond the fresh water sea is the region of gold, which shines like the bright surface of a mirror, but from which no sensible object presented to it is ever reflected, and consequently it is avoided by living creatures. The mountain range by which it is encircled is termed Lokáloka, because the world is separated by it from that which is not world; for which purpose it was placed by Íśwara on the limit of the three worlds; and its height and breadth are such that the rays of the heavenly luminaries, from the sun to the polar-star, which spread over the regions within the mountain, cannot penetrate beyond it." According to Col. Wilford, however, there is a chasm in the belt, and a sea beyond it, where Vishńu abides; but he has not given his authorities for this. (As. Res. XI. 54.) The Mohammedan legends of Koh Kaf, 'the stony girdle that surrounds the world,' are evidently connected with the Lokáloka of the Hindus. According to the Śiva Tantra, the El Dorado, at the foot of the Lokáloka mountains, is the play-ground of the gods.

  7. This comprises the planetary spheres; for the diameter of the seven zones and oceans--each ocean being of the same diameter as the continent it encloses, and each successive continent being twice the diameter of that which precedes it--amounts to but two crones and fifty-four lacs. The golden land is twice the diameter of Pushkara, or two crones and fifty-six lacs; and the Lokáloka is but ten thousand Yojanas. So that the whole is five crores ten lacs and ten thousand (5.10.10.000). According to the Śiva Tantra, the golden land is ten crores of Yojanas, making, with the seven continents, one fourth of the whole measurement. Other calculations occur, the incompatibility of which is said by the commentators on our text, and on that of the Bhágavata, to arise from reference being made to different Kalpas, and they quote the same stanza to this effect: 'Whenever any contradictions in different Puráńas are observed, they are ascribed by the pious to differences of Kalpas and the like.'

II.5Book II, Chapter 5 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीपराशर उवाच
विस्तार एष कथितः पृथिव्या भवतो मया
सप्ततिस्तु सहस्राणि द्विजोच्छ्रायोपि कथ्यते १
दशसाहस्रमेकैकं पातालं मुनिसत्तम
अतलं वितलं चैव नितलं च गभस्तिमत्
महाख्यं सुतलं चाग्र्यं पातालं चापि सप्तमम् २
शुक्लाकृष्णारुणाः पीताः शर्कराः शैलकांचनाः
भूमयो यत्र मैत्रेय वरप्रासादमंडिताः ३
तेषु दानवदैतेया यक्षाश्च शतशस्तथा
निवसन्ति महानागजातयश्च महामुने ४
स्वर्लोकादपि रम्याणि पातालानीति नारदः
प्राह स्वर्गसदां मध्ये पातालाभ्यागतो दिवि ५
आह्लादकारिणः शुभ्रा मणयो यत्र सुप्रभाः
नागाभरणभूषासु पातालं केन तत्समम् ६
दैत्यदानवकन्याभिरितश्चेतश्च शोभिते
पाताले कस्य न प्रीतिर्विमुक्तस्यापि जायते ७
दिवार्करश्मयो यत्र प्रभां तन्वन्ति नातपम्
शशिरश्मिर्न शीताय निशि द्योताय केवलम् ८
भक्ष्यभोज्यमहापानमुदितैरपि भोगिभिः
यत्र न ज्ञायते कालो गतोपि दनुजादिभिः ९
वनानि नद्यो रम्याणि सरांसि कमलाकराः
पुंस्कोकिलाभिलापाश्च मनोज्ञान्यम्बराणि च १०
भूषणान्यतिशुभ्राणि गन्धाढ्यं चानुलेपनम्
वीणावेणुमृदंगानां स्वनैरापूरितानि च ११
एतान्यन्यानि चोदारभाग्यभोग्यानि दानवैः
दैत्योरगैश्च भुज्यन्ते पातालान्तरगोचरैः १२
पातालानामधश्चास्ते विष्णोर्या तामसी तनुः
शेषाख्या यद्गुणान्वक्तुं न शक्ता दैत्यदानवाः १३
योनन्तः पठ्यते सिद्धैर्दैवो देवर्षिपूजितः
स सहस्रशिरा व्यक्तस्वस्तिकामलभूषणः १४
फणामणिसहस्रेण यः स विद्योतयन्दिशः
सर्वान्करोति निर्वीर्यान् हिताय जगतोऽसुरान् १५
मदाघूर्णितनेत्रोसौ यः सदैवैककुण्डलः
किरीटी स्रग्धरो भाति साग्निः श्वेत इवाचलः १६
नीलवासा मदोत्सिक्तः श्वेतहारोपशोभितः
साभ्रगङ्गाप्रवाहोसौ कैलासाद्रिरिवापरः १७
लाङ्गलासक्तहस्ताग्रो बिभ्रन्मुसलमुत्तमम्
उपास्यते स्वयं कान्त्या यो वारुण्या च मूर्त्तया १८
कल्पान्ते यस्य वक्त्रेभ्यो विषानलशिखोज्ज्वलः
संकर्षणात्मको रुद्रो निष्क्रम्यात्ति जगत्त्रयम् १९
स बिभ्रच्छेखरीभूतमशेषं क्षितिमण्डलम्
आस्ते पातालमूलस्थः शेषोऽशेषसुरार्चितः २०
तस्य वीर्यं प्रभावश्च स्वरूपं रूपमेव च
न हि वर्णयितुं शक्यं ज्ञातुं च त्रिदशैरपि २१
यस्यैषा सकला पृथ्वी फणामणिशिखारुणा
आस्ते कुसुममालेव कस्तद्वीर्यं वदिष्यति २२
यदा विजृम्भतेनन्तो मदाघूर्णितलोचनः
तदा चलति भूरेषा साब्धितोया सकानना २३
गन्धर्वाप्सरसः सिद्धाः किन्नरोरगचारणाः
नान्तं गुणानां गच्छन्ति तेनानन्तोयमव्ययः २४
यस्य नागवधूहस्तैर्लगितं हरिचन्दनम्
मुहुः श्वासानिलापास्तं याति दिक्क्षोदवासताम् २५
यमाराध्य पूराणर्षिर्गर्गो ज्योतींषि तत्त्वतः
ज्ञातवान्सकलं चैव निमित्तपठितं फलम् २६
तेनेयं नागवर्येण शिरसा विधृता मही
बिभर्ति मालां लोकानां सदेवासुरमानुषाम् २७
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेंशो! पंचमोऽध्यायः ५

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. V.

Of the seven regions of Pátála, below the earth. Nárada's praises of Pátála. Account of the serpent Śesha. First teacher of astronomy and astrology.

PARÁŚARA.--The extent of the surface of the earth has been thus described to you, Maitreya. Its depth below the surface is said to be seventy thousand Yojanas, each of the seven regions of Pátála extending downwards ten thousand. These seven, worthy Muni, are called Atala, Vitala, Nitala, Gabhastimat, Mahátala, Sutala, and Pátála 1. Their soil is severally white, black, purple, yellow, sandy, stony, and of gold. They are embellished with magnificent palaces, in which dwell numerous Dánavas, Daityas, Yakshas, and great snake-gods. The Muni Nárada, after his return from those regions to the skies 2, declared amongst the celestials that Pátála was much more delightful than Indra's heaven. "What," exclaimed the sage, "can be compared to Pátála, where the Nágas are decorated with brilliant and beautiful and pleasure-shedding jewels? who will not delight in Pátála, where the lovely daughters of the Daityas and Dánavas wander about, fascinating even the most austere; where the rays of the sun diffuse light, and not heat, by day; and where the moon shines by night for illumination, not for cold; where the sons of Danu, happy in the enjoyment of delicious viands and strong wines, know not how time passes? There are beautiful groves and streams and lakes where the lotus blows; and the skies are resonant with the Koïl's song. Splendid ornaments, fragrant perfumes, rich unguents, the blended music of the lute and pipe and tabor; these and many other enjoyments are the common portion of the Dánavas, Daityas, and snake-gods, who inhabit the regions of Pátála 3."

p. 205

Below the seven Pátálas is the form of Vishńu, proceeding from the quality of darkness, which is called Śesha 4, the excellencies of which neither Daityas nor Dánavas can fully enumerate. This being is called Ananta by the spirits of heaven, and is worshipped by sages and by gods. He has a thousand heads, which are embellished with the pure and visible mystic sign 5: and the thousand jewels in his crests give light to all the regions. For the benefit of the world he: deprives the Asuras of their strength. He rolls his eyes fiercely, as if intoxicated. He wears a single ear-ring, a diadem, and wreath upon each brow; and shines like the white mountains topped with flame. He is clothed in purple raiment, and ornamented with a white necklace, and looks like another Kailása, with the heavenly Gangá flowing down its precipices. In one hand he holds a plough, and in the other a pestle; and he is attended by Váruńí (the goddess of wine), who is his own embodied radiance. From his mouths, at the end of the Kalpa, proceeds the venomed fire that, impersonated as Rudra, who is one with Balaráma, devours the three worlds.

p. 206

Śesha bears the entire world, like a diadem, upon his head, and he is the foundation on which the seven Pátálas rest. His power, his glory, his form, his nature, cannot be described, cannot he comprehended by the gods themselves. Who shall recount his might, who wears this whole earth, like a garland of flowers, tinged of a purple dye by the radiance of the jewels of his crests. When Ananta, his eyes rolling with intoxication, yawns, then earth, with all her woods, and mountains, and seas, and rivers, trembles. Gandharbas, Apsarasas, Siddhas, Kinnaras, Uragas, and Chárańas are unequal to hymn his praises, and therefore he is called the infinite (Ananta), the imperishable. The sandal paste, that is ground by the wives of the snake-gods, is scattered abroad by his breath, and sheds perfume around the skies.

The ancient sage Garga 6, having propitiated Śesha, acquired from him a knowledge of the principles of astronomical science, of the planets, and of the good and evil denoted by the aspects of the heavens.

The earth, sustained upon the head of this sovereign serpent, supports in its turn the garland of the spheres, along with their inhabitants, men, demons, and gods.

Translator’s notes (6)
  1. In the Bhágavata and Padma P. they are named Atala, Vitala, Sutala, Talátala, Mahátala, Rasátala, and Pátála. The Váyu has Rasátala, Sutala, Vitala, Gabhastala, Mahátala, Śrítala, and Pátála. There are other varieties.

  2. Allusion is here made, perhaps, to the description given in the Mahábhárata, Udyoga Parva, p. 218, of Nárada's and Mátali's visit to Pátála. Several of the particulars there given are not noticed in the Puráńas.

  3. There is no very copious description of Pátála in any of the Puráńas. The most circumstantial are those of the Váyu and Bhágavata: the latter has been repeated, p. 205 with some additions, in the first chapters of the Pátála Khańd́a of the Padma Puráńa. The Mahábhárata and these two Puráńas assign different divisions to the Dánavas, Daityas, and Nágas; placing Vásuki and the other Nága chiefs in the lowest: but the Váyu has the cities of the principal Daityas and Nágas in each; as in the first, those of the Daitya Namuchi, and serpent Kálíya; in the second, of Hayagríva and Takshaka; in the third, of Prahláda and Hemaka; in the fourth, of Kálanemi and Vainateya; in the fifth, of Hirańyáksha and Kirmíra; and in the sixth, of Pulomán and Vásuki: besides others. Bali the Daitya is the sovereign of Pátála, according to this authority. The Mahábhárata places Vásuki in Rasátala, and calls his capital Bhogavatí. The regions of Pátála, and their inhabitants, are oftener the subjects of profane, than of sacred fiction, in consequence of the frequent intercourse between mortal heroes and the Nága-kanyás, or serpent-nymphs. A considerable section of the Vrihat Kathá, the Súryaprabhá lambaka, consists of adventures and events in this subterraneous world.

  4. Śesha is commonly described as being in this situation: he is the great serpent on which Vishńu sleeps during the intervals of creation, and upon whose numerous heads the world is supported. The Puráńas, making him one with Balaráma or Sankarshana, who is an impersonation or incarnation of Śesha, blend the attributes of the serpent and the demigod in their description.

  5. With the Swastika, a particular diagram used in mystical ceremonies.

  6. One of the oldest writers on astronomy amongst the Hindus. According to Mr. Bentley, his Sanhitá dates 548 B. C. (Ancient Astron. of the Hindus, p. 59.)

II.6Book II, Chapter 6 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

पराशर उवाच
ततश्च नरका विप्र भुवोधः सलिलस्य च ।
पापिनो येषु पात्यन्ते ताञ्छृणुष्वमहामुने ॥ २,६.१ ॥
रौरवः सूकरो रोधस्तालो विशसनस्तथा ।
महाज्वालस्तप्तकुम्भो लवणेथ विलोहितः ॥ २,६.२ ॥
रुधिराम्भो वैतरणिः क्रिमिशः क्रिमिभोजनः ।
असिपत्रवनं कृष्णो लालाभक्षश्च दारुणः ॥ २,६.३ ॥
तथा पूयवहः पापो वह्निज्वालो ह्यधः शिराः ।
संदंशः कालसूत्रश्च तमश्चावीचिरेव च ॥ २,६.४ ॥
श्वभोजनोथाप्रतिष्ठश्चाप्रचिश्च तथा परः ।
इत्येवमादयश्चान्ये नरका भृशदारुणाः ॥ २,६.५ ॥
यमस्य विषये घोराः शस्त्राग्निभयदायिनः ।
पतन्ति येषु पुरुषाः पापकर्मरतास्तु ये ॥ २,६.६ ॥
कूटसाक्षी तथासम्यक्पक्षपातेन यो वदेत् ।
यश्चान्यदनृतं वक्ति स नरो याति रौरवम् ॥ २,६.७ ॥
भ्रूणहा पुरहन्ता च गौघ्नश्च मुनिसत्तम ।
यान्ति ते नरकं रोधं यश्चोच्छ्वासनिरोधकः ॥ २,६.८ ॥
सुरापो ब्रह्महा हर्ता सुवर्णस्य च सूकरे ।
प्रयान्ति नरके यश्च तैः संसर्गमुपैति वै ॥ २,६.९ ॥
राजन्यवैश्यहन्ता च तथैव गुरुतल्पगः ।
तप्तकुण्डेस्वसृगामी हन्ति राजभटांश्च यः ॥ २,६.१० ॥
साध्वीविक्रयकृद्बन्धपालः केसरिविक्रयी ।
तप्तलोहे पतन्त्येते यश्च च भक्तं परित्यजेत् ॥ २,६.११ ॥
स्नुषां सुतां चापि गत्वा महाज्वाले निपात्यते ।
अवमन्ता गुरूणां यो यश्चाक्रोष्टा नराधमः ॥ २,६.१२ ॥
वेददूषयितायश्च वेदविक्रयकश्च यः ।
अगम्यगामी यश्च स्यात्ते यान्ति लवणं द्विज ॥ २,६.१३ ॥
चोरो विलोहे पतति मर्यादादूषकस्तथा ॥ २,६.१४ ॥
देवद्विजपितृद्वेष्टा रत्नदूषयिता च यः ।
स याति क्रिमिभक्षे वै क्रिमीशे च दुरिष्टकृत् ॥ २,६.१५ ॥
पितृदेवातिथींस्त्यक्त्वा पर्यश्नाति नराधमः ।
लालाभक्षे स यात्युग्रे शरकर्ता च वेधके ॥ २,६.१६ ॥
करोति कर्णिनो यश्च यश्च खङ्गादिकृन्नरः ।
प्रयान्त्येते विशसने नरके भृशदरुणे ॥ २,६.१७ ॥
असत्प्रतिगृहीता तु नरके यात्यधोमुखे ।
अयाज्ययाजकश्चैव तथा नक्षत्रसूचकः ॥ २,६.१८ ॥
वेगी पूयवहे चैको याति मष्टान्नभुङ्गरः ॥ २,६.१९ ॥
लाक्षामासरसानां च तिलानां लवणस्य च ।
विक्रेता ब्रह्मणो याति तमेव नरकं द्विज ॥ २,६.२० ॥
मार्जारकुक्कुटच्छाग श्ववराहविहङ्गमान् ।
पोषयन्नरकं याति तमेव द्विजसत्तम ॥ २,६.२१ ॥
रङ्गोपजीवी कैवर्तः कुम्डाशी गरदस्तथा ।
सूची माहिषकश्चैव पर्वकारी च यो द्विजः ॥ २,६.२२ ॥
अगारदाही मित्रघ्नः शाकुनिर्ग्रमयाजकः ।
रुधिरान्धे पतन्त्येते सोमं विक्रीणते च ये ॥ २,६.२३ ॥
मखहा ग्रामहन्ता च याति वैतरणीं नरः ॥ २,६.२४ ॥
रेतः पातादिकर्तारो मर्यादाभेदिनो हि ये ।
ते कृष्णे यान्त्यशौचाश्च कुहकाजीविनश्च ये ॥ २,६.२५ ॥
असिपत्रवनं याति वनच्छेदी वृथैव यः ।
औरभ्रिको मृगव्याधो वह्निज्वाले पतन्ति वै ॥ २,६.२६ ॥
यान्त्येते द्विज तत्रैव ये चापाकेषु वह्निदाः ॥ २,६.२७ ॥
व्रतानां लोपको यश्चस्वाश्रमाद्विच्युतश्च यः ।
सन्दंशयातनामध्ये पततस्तावुभावपि ॥ २,६.२८ ॥
दिवा स्वप्ने च स्कन्दन्ते ये नरा ब्रह्मचारिणः ।
पुत्रैरध्यापिता ये च ते पतन्ति श्वभोजने ॥ २,६.२९ ॥
एते चान्ये च नरकाः शतशोथ सहस्रशः ।
येषु दुष्कृतकर्माणः पच्यन्ते यातनागताः ॥ २,६.३० ॥
यथैव पापान्येतानि तथान्यानि सहस्रशः ।
भुज्यन्ते तानि पुरुषैर्नरकान्तरगोचरैः ॥ २,६.३१ ॥
वर्णाश्रमविरुद्धं च कर्म कुर्वन्ति ये नराः ।
कर्मणा मनसा वाचा निरयेषु पतन्ति ते ॥ २,६.३२ ॥
अधः शिरोभिदृश्यन्ते नारकैर्दिवि देवताः ।
देवाश्चाधोमुखान्सर्वानधः पश्यन्ति नारकान् ॥ २,६.३३ ॥
स्थावराः क्रिमयोब्जाश्च पक्षिणः पशवो नराः ।
धार्मिकास्त्रिदशास्तद्धन्मोक्षिणश्च यथाक्रमम् ॥ २,६.३४ ॥
सहस्रभागप्रथमा द्वितीयानुक्रमास्तथा ।
सर्वे ह्येते महाभागा यावन्मुक्तिसमाश्रयाः ॥ २,६.३५ ॥
यावन्तो जन्तवः स्वर्गे तावन्तो नरकौकसः ।
पापकृद्याति नरकं प्रायाश्चित्तपराङ्मुखः ॥ २,६.३६ ॥
पापानामनुरूपाणि प्रायश्चित्तानि यद्यथा ।
तथा तथैव संस्मृत्य प्रोक्तानि परमर्षिभिः ॥ २,६.३७ ॥
पापे गुरूणि गुरुणि स्वल्पान्यल्पे च तद्विदः ।
प्रायश्चित्तानि मैत्रेय जगुः स्वायंभुवादयः ॥ २,६.३८ ॥
प्रायश्चित्तान्यशेषाणि तपःकर्मात्मकानि वै ।
यानि तेषामशेषाणां कृष्णानुस्मरणम्परम् ॥ २,६.३९ ॥
कृते पापेऽनुतापो वै यस्य पुंसः प्रजायते ।
प्रायश्चित्तं तु तस्यैकं हरिसंस्मरणं परम् ॥ २,६.४० ॥
प्रातर्निशि तथा सन्ध्यामध्याह्नादिषु संस्मरन् ।
नारायणमवाप्नोति सद्यः पापक्षयन्नरः ।
विष्णुसंस्मरणात्क्षीणसमस्तक्लेशसञ्चयः ।
मुक्तिं प्रयाति स्वर्गाप्तिस्तस्य विघ्नोनुमीयते ॥ २,६.४२ ॥
वासुदेवे मनो यस्यजपहोमार्चनादिषु ।
तस्यान्तरायो मैत्रेय देवेन्द्रत्वादिकं फलम् ॥ २,६.४३ ॥
क्व नाकपृष्ठगमनं पुनरावृत्तिलक्षणम् ।
क्व जपो वासुदेवेति मुक्तिबीजमनुत्तमम् ॥ २,६.४४ ॥
तस्मादहर्निशं विष्णुं संस्मरन्पुरुषो मुने ।
न याति नरकं मर्त्यः संक्षीणाखिलपातकः ॥ २,६.४५ ॥
मनः प्रीतिकरः स्वर्गो नरकस्तद्विपर्ययः ।
नरकस्वर्गसंज्ञे वै पापपुण्ये द्विजोत्तम ॥ २,६.४६ ॥
वस्त्वेकमेव दुःखाय सुखायेर्ष्यागमाय च ।
कोपाय च यतस्तस्माद्वस्तु वस्त्वात्मकं कुतः ॥ २,६.४७ ॥
तदेव प्रीतये भूत्वा पुनर्दुःखाय जायते ।
तदेव कोपाय यतः प्रसादाय च जायते ॥ २,६.४८ ॥
तस्माद्दुःखात्मकं नास्ति न च किञ्चित्सुखात्मकम् ।
मनसः परिणामोयं सुखदुःखादिलक्षणः ॥ २,६.४९ ॥
ज्ञानमेव परं ब्रह्म ज्ञानं बन्धाय चेष्यते ।
ज्ञानात्मकमिदं विश्वं न ज्ञानाद्विद्यते परम् ॥ २,६.५० ॥
विद्याविद्येति मैत्रेय ज्ञानमेवोपधारय ॥ २,६.५१ ॥
एवमेतन्मयाख्यातं भवतो मण्डलं भुवः ।
पातालानि च सर्वाणि तथैव नरका द्विज ॥ २,६.५२ ॥
समुद्राः पर्वताश्चैव द्वीपा वर्षाणि निम्नगाः ।
संक्षेपात्सर्वमाख्यातं किं भूयः श्रोतुमिच्छसि ॥ २,६.५३ ॥
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेऽंशे षष्ठोऽध्यायः (६)

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. VI.

Of the different hells or divisions of Naraka, below Pátála: the crimes punished in them respectively: efficacy of expiation: meditation on Vishńu the most effective expiation.

PARÁŚARA.--I will now, great Muni, give you an account of the hells which are situated beneath the earth and beneath the waters 1, and into which sinners are finally sent.

The names of the different Narakas are as follows: Raurava, Śúkara, Rodha, Tála, Viśasana, Mahájwála, Taptakumbha, Lavańa, Vimohana, Rudhirándha, Vaitaraní, Krimíśa, Krimibhojana, Asipatravana, Krishńa, Lálábhaksha, Dáruńa, Púyaváha, Pápa, Vahnijwála, Adhośiras, Sandansa, Kálasútra, Tamas, Avíchi, Śwabhojana, Apratisht́ha, and another Avíchi 2. These and many other fearful hells are the awful provinces of the kingdom of Yama, terrible with instruments of torture and with fire; into which are hurled all those who are addicted when alive to sinful practices 3.

The man who bears false witness through partiality, or who utters any falsehood, is condemned to the Raurava (dreadful) hell. He who causes abortion, plunders a town, kills a cow, or strangles a man, goes to the

p. 208

[paragraph continues] Rodha hell (or that of obstruction). The murderer of a Brahman, stealer of gold, or drinker of wine, goes to the Súkara (swine) hell; as does any one who associates with them. The murderer of a man of the second or third castes, and one who is guilty of adultery with the wife of his spiritual teacher, is sentenced to the Tála (padlock) hell: and one who holds incestuous intercourse with a sister, or murders an ambassador, to Taptakumbha (or the hell of heated caldrons). The seller of his wife, a gaoler, a horsedealer, and one who deserts his adherents, falls into the Taptaloha (red-hot iron) hell. He who commits incest with a daughter-in-law or a daughter is cast into the Mahájwála hell (or that of great flame): and he who is disrespectful to his spiritual guide, who is abusive to his betters, who reviles the Vedas, or who sells them 4, who associates with women in a prohibited degree, into the Lavańa (salt) hell. A thief and a contemner of prescribed observances falls into Vimohana (the place of bewildering). He who hates his father, the Brahmans, and the gods, or who spoils precious gems, is punished in the Krimibhaksha hell (where worms are his food): and he who practises magic rites for the harm of others, in the hell called Krimíśa (that of insects). The vile wretch who eats his meal before offering food to the gods, to the manes, or to guests, falls into the hell called Lálábhaksha (where saliva is given for food). The maker of arrows is sentenced to the Vedhaka (piercing) hell: and the maker of lances, swords, and other weapons, to the dreadful hell called Viśasana (murderous). He who takes unlawful gifts goes to the Adhomukha (or head-inverted) hell; as does one who offers sacrifices to improper objects, and an observer of the stars (for the prediction of events). He who eats by himself sweetmeats mixed with his rice 5, and a Brahman who vends Lac, flesh, liquors, sesamum, or salt, or one who commits violence, fall into the hell (where matter flows, or) Púyaváha; as do they who rear cats, cocks, goats, dogs, hogs, or birds. Public performers 6, fishermen, the follower of one born in adultery, a poisoner,

p. 209

an informer, one who lives by his wife's prostitution 7, one who attends to secular affairs on the days of the Parvas (or full and new moon, &c.) 8, an incendiary, a treacherous friend, a soothsayer, one who performs religious ceremonies for rustics, and those who sell the acid Asclepias, used in sacrifices, go to the Rudhirándha hell (whose wells are of blood). He who destroys a bee-hive, or pillages a hamlet, is condemned to the Vaitarańí hell. He who causes impotence, trespasses on others' lands, is impure, or who lives by fraud, is punished in the hell called (black, or) Krishńa. He who wantonly cuts down trees goes to the Asipatravana hell (the leaves of whose trees are swords): and a tender on sheep, and hunter of deer, to the hell termed Vahnijwála (or fiery flame); as do those who apply fire to unbaked vessels (potters). The violator of a vow, and one who breaks the rules of his order, falls into the Sandansa (or hell of pincers): and the religious student who sleeps in the day, and is, though unconsciously, defiled; and they who, though mature, are instructed in sacred literature by their children, receive punishment in the hell called Śwabhojana (where they feed upon dogs). These hells, and hundreds and thousands of others, are the places in which sinners pay the penalty of their crimes. As numerous as are the offences that men commit, so many are the hells in which they are punished: and all who deviate from the duties imposed upon them by their caste and condition, whether in thought, word, or deed, are sentenced to punishment in the regions of the damned 9.

The gods in heaven are beheld by the inhabitants of hell, as they move with their heads inverted; whilst the god, as they cast their eyes

p. 210

downwards, behold the sufferings of those in hell 10. The various stages of existence, Maitreya, are inanimate things, fish, birds, animals, men, holy men, gods, and liberated spirits; each in succession a thousand degrees superior to that which precedes it: and through these stages the beings that are either in heaven or in hell are destined to proceed, until final emancipation be obtained 11. That sinner goes to Naraka who neglects the due expiation of his guilt.

For, Maitreya, suitable acts of expiation have been enjoined by the great sages for every kind of crime 12. Arduous penances for great sins, trifling ones for minor offences, have been propounded by Swáyambhuva and others: but reliance upon Krishńa is far better than any such expiatory acts, as religious austerity, or the like. Let any one who repents of the sin of which he may have been culpable have recourse to this best of all expiations, remembrance of Hari 13: by addressing his thoughts to Náráyańa at dawn, at night, at sunset, and midday, a man shall be quickly cleansed from all guilt: the whole heap of worldly sorrows is dispersed by meditating on Hari; and his worshipper, looking upon heavenly fruition as an impediment to felicity, obtains final emancipation. He

p. 211

whose mind is devoted to Hari in silent prayer, burnt-offering, or adoration, is impatient even of the glory of the king of the gods. Of what avail is ascent to the summit of heaven, if it is necessary to return from thence to earth. How different is the meditation on Vásudeva, which is the seed of eternal freedom. Hence, Muni, the man who thinks of Vishńu, day and night, goes not to Naraka after death, for all his sins are atoned for.

Heaven (or Swarga) is that which delights the mind; hell (or Naraka) is that which gives it pain: hence vice is called hell; virtue is called heaven 14. The selfsame thing is applicable to the production of pleasure or pain, of malice or of anger. Whence then can it be considered as essentially the same with either? That which at one time is a source of enjoyment, becomes at another the cause of suffering; and the same thing may at different seasons excite wrath, or conciliate favour. It follows, then, that nothing is in itself either pleasurable or painful; and pleasure and pain, and the like, are merely definitions of various states of mind. That which alone is truth is wisdom; but wisdom may be the cause of confinement to existence; for all this universe is wisdom, there is nothing different from it; and consequently, Maitreya, you are to conclude that both knowledge and ignorance are comprised in wisdom 15.

I have thus described to you the orb of the earth; the regions below its surface, or Pátálas; and the Narakas, or hells; and have briefly enumerated its oceans, mountains, continents, regions, and rivers: what else do you wish to hear?

Translator’s notes (15)
  1. The Bhágavata places the Narakas above the waters. The commentator on our text endeavours to reconcile the difference, by explaining the text to imply a dark cavity in which the waters are received, not the original abysses where they were collected at first, and above which Tartarus lies.

  2. Some of these names are the same that are given by Manu, b. IV. v. 88-90. Kullúka Bhat́t́a refers to the Márkańd́eya P. for a description of the twenty-one divisions of hell; but the account there given is not more ample than that of our text. The Bhágavata enumerates twenty-eight, but many of the names differ from the above. In the last instance the term Avíchi is either inaccurately repeated, or the adjective Apara is intended to distinguish it from the previous Avíchi. In Manu, Mahávíchi occurs.

  3. The Padma P. (Kriya Yoga Sára) and the Śiva Dharma, which appears to be a section of the Skánda P., contain a number of interesting circumstances previous to the infliction of punishment. It appears also from them that Yama fulfils the office of judge of the dead, as well as sovereign of the damned; all that die appearing before him, and being confronted with Chitragupta, the recorder, by whom their actions have been registered. The virtuous are thence conveyed to Swarga, or Elysium, whilst the wicked are driven to the different regions of Naraka, or Tartarus.

  4. 'Who teaches the Vedas for hire.' This notion still prevails, and renders the few Pandits who are acquainted with the Vedas very unwilling to teach them for a gratuity.

  5. 'Thereby,' observes the commentator, 'defrauding or disappointing children.'

  6. Rangopajivina: the commentator explains it wrestlers and boxers, but Ranga applies to any stage or arena.

  7. The term in the text is Máhishika, which might mean a feeder of buffaloes; but the commentator quotes a text from the Smriti, authorizing the sense above followed.

  8. This is the interpretation of Parvakárí; it is also read Parvagámí, he who cohabits with his wife on prohibited days.'

  9. An account of Naraka is found in only a few of the Puráńas, and in less detail than in the text. The Bhágavata and Váyu have similar descriptions of them. The Márkańd́eya enters into detail in some of the instances only. A short account is found in the Śiva, Garura, and Brahma Vaivartta P. and in the Káśí Khańd́a of the Skánda P. The fullest descriptions, however, are those mentioned in a previous note as being in the Śiva Dharma of the Skánda, and Kriya Yoga Sára of the Padma; works of a somewhat equivocal character, and belonging rather to Tántra than Pauráńik literature.

  10. The commentator observes that the sight of heavenly bliss is given to the damned in order to exacerbate their torments; whilst the inflictions of hell are exhibited to the gods to teach them disregard of even heavenly enjoyments, as they are but of temporary duration.

  11. That is, when punishment or reward in hell or heaven, proportioned to the sin or virtue of the individual, has been received, he must be born again as a stone or plant, and gradually migrate through the several inferior conditions, until he is once more born a man; his future state is then in his own power.

  12. Manu is here especially intended, as the commentator observes.

  13. This remembrance of Vishńu is the frequent reiteration of any or all of his names: hence the lower orders of Hindus procure a starling or parrot, that, in the act of teaching it to cry Ráma or Krishńa or Rádhá, they may themselves repeat these appellations; the simple recitation of which, even if accidentally, irreverently, or reluctantly performed, is meritorious. Thus according to the Vishńu Disarms Tantra: 'Let a man ever and every where repeat the names of the discus-armed (Vishńu); for its repetition, even by one who is impure, is a means of purification. Hari removes all sins, even when invoked by evil-minded persons, as fire burns one by whom it is unwillingly approached.'

  14. The object of the text, according to the commentator, is to shew that the common notions of heaven and hell are erroneous; that they are only temporal pleasure and temporal pain; and virtue and vice, being the origin of transient, and therefore unreal effects, are themselves unrealities: there is nothing real but faith in Vishńu.

  15. Text and comment are here somewhat obscure; but the purport of the former seems to be the explanation of the existence of Jnyán wisdom, both as a genus and a species: in the former case it is all that is; and in the latter, it may be either true or false wisdom: the latter being influenced by notions of self or individuality, and therefore the cause of confinement to existence; the former dissipating the belief of self, and being therefore the cause of liberation from bodily being.

II.7Book II, Chapter 7 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

कथितं भूतलं ब्रह्मन्ममैतदखिलं त्वया ।
भुवर्लोकादिकाँ ल्लोकाञ्छ्रोतुमिच्छाम्यहं मुने १ ।
तथैव ग्रहसंस्थानं प्रमाणानि यथा तथा ।
समाचक्ष्व महाभाग तन्मह्यं परिपृच्छते २ ।
श्रीपराशर उवाच ।
रविचन्द्र मसोर्यावन्मयूखैरवभास्यते ।
ससमुद्र सरिच्छैला तावती पृथिवी स्मृता ३ ।
यावत्प्रमाणा पृथिवी विस्तारपरिमण्डलात् ।
नभस्तावन्प्रमाणं वै व्यासमण्डलतो द्विज ४ ।
भूमेर्यो जनलक्षे तु सौरं मैत्रेय मण्डलम् ।
लक्षाद्दिवाकरस्यापि मण्डलं शशिनः स्थितम् ५ ।
पूर्णे शतसहस्रे तु योजनानां निशाकरात् ।
नक्षत्रमण्डलं कृत्स्नमुपरिष्टात्प्रकाशते ६ ।
द्वे लक्षे चोत्तरे ब्रह्मन् बुधो नक्षत्रमण्डलात् ।
तावत्प्रमाणभागे तु बुधस्याप्युशनाः स्थितः ७ ।
अङ्गारकोपि शुक्रस्य तत्प्रमाणे व्यवस्थितः ।
लक्षद्वये तु भौमस्य स्थितो देवपुरोहितः ८ ।
सौरिर्बृहस्पतेश्चोर्ध्वं द्विलक्षे समवस्थितः ।
सप्तर्षिमण्डलं तस्माल्लक्षमेकं द्विजोत्तम ९ ।
ऋषिभ्यस्तु सहस्राणां शतादूर्ध्वं व्यवस्थितः ।
मेढीभूतः समस्तस्य ज्योतिश्चक्रस्य वै ध्रुवः १० ।
त्रैलोक्यमेतत्कथितमुत्सेधेन महामुने ।
इज्याफलस्य भूरेषा इज्या चात्र प्रतिष्ठिता ११ ।
ध्रुवादूर्ध्वं महर्लोको यत्र ते कल्पवासिनः ।
एकयोजनकोटिस्तु यत्र ते कल्पवासिनः १२ ।
द्वे कोटी तु जनो लोको यत्र ते ब्रह्मणः सुताः ।
सनन्दनाद्याः प्रथिता मैत्रेयामलचेतसः १३ ।
चतुर्गणोत्तरे चोर्ध्वं जनलोकात्तपः स्थितः ।
वैराजा यत्र ते देवाः स्थिता दाहविर्जिताः १४ ।
षड्गुणेन तपोलोकात्सत्यलोको विराजते ।
अपुनर्मारका यत्र ब्रह्मलोको हि संस्मृतः १५ ।
पादगम्यन्तु यत्किञ्चिद्वस्त्वस्ति पृथिवीमयम् ।
स भूर्लोकः समाख्यातो विस्तरोस्य मयोदितः १६ ।
भूमिसूर्यान्तरं यच्च सिद्धादिमुनिसेवितम् ।
भुवर्लोकस्तु सोप्युक्तो द्वितीयो मुनिसत्तम १७ ।
ध्रुवसूर्यान्तरं यच्च नियुतानि चतुर्दश ।
स्वर्लोकः सोपि गदितो लोकसंस्थानचिन्तकैः १८ ।
त्रैलोक्यमेतत्कृतकं मैत्रेय परिपठ्यते ।
जनस्तपस्तथा सत्यमिति चाकृतकं त्रयम् १९ ।
कृतकाकृतयोर्मध्ये महर्लोक इति स्मृतः ।
शून्यो भवति कल्पान्ते योत्यन्तं न विनश्यति २० ।
एते सप्त मया लोका मैत्रेय कथितास्तव ।
पातालानि च सप्तैव ब्रह्माण्डस्यैष विस्तरः २१ ।
एतदण्डकटाहेन तिर्यक् चोर्ध्वमधस्तथा ।
कपित्थस्य यथा बीजं सर्वतो वै समावृतम् २२ ।
दशोत्तरेण पयसा मैत्रेयांडं च तद्वृतम् ।
सर्वोम्बुपरिधानोसौ वह्निना वेष्टितो बहिः २३ ।
वह्निश्च वायुना वायुर्मैत्रेय नभसा वृतः ।
भूतादिना नभः सोपि महता परहिवेष्टितः ।
देशोत्तराण्यश्षोआ!णि मैत्रेयैतानि सप्त वै २४ ।
महान्तं च समावृत्य प्रधानं समवस्थितम् ।
अनन्तस्य न तस्यान्तः संख्यानं चापि विद्यते २५ ।
तदन्तमसंख्यातप्रमाणं चापि वै यतः ।
हेतुभूतमसेषस्य प्रकृतिः सा परा मुने २६ ।
अंडानां तु सहस्राणां सहस्राण्ययुतानि च ।
ईदृशानां तथा तत्र कोटिकोटिशतानि च २७ ।
हारुण्यग्निर्यथा तैलं तिले तद्वत्पुमानपि ।
प्रधानेऽवस्थितो व्यापी चेतनात्मात्मवेदनः २८ ।
प्रधानं च पुमांश्चैव सर्वभूतात्मभूतया ।
विष्णुशक्त्या महाबुद्धे वृतौ संश्रयधर्मिणौ २९ ।
तयोः सैव पृथग्भावकारणं संश्रयस्य च ।
क्षोभकारणभूता च सर्गकाले महामते ३० ।
यथा सक्तं जले वातो बिभर्त्ति कणिकाशतम् ।
शक्तिः सापि तथा विष्णोः प्रधानपुरुषात्मकम् ३१ ।
यथा च पादयोर्मूलस्कन्धशाखादिसंयुतः ।
आदिबीजात्प्रभवति बीजान्यन्यानि वै ततः ३२ ।
प्रभवन्ति ततस्तेभ्यः सम्भवन्त्यपरे द्रु माः ।
तेपि तल्लक्षणद्र व्यकारणानुगता मुने ३३ ।
एवमव्याकृतात्पूर्वं जायन्ते महदादयः ।
विशेषान्तास्ततस्तेभ्यः संभवंत्यसुरादयः ।
तेभ्यश्च पुत्रास्तेषां च पुत्राणामपरे सुताः ३४ ।
बीजाद्वृक्षप्ररोहेण यथा नापचयस्तरोः ।
भूतानां भूतसर्गेण नैवास्त्यपचयस्तथा ३५ ।
सन्निधानाद्यथाकाशकालाद्याः कारणं तरोः ।
तथैवापरिणामेव विश्वस्य भगवान्हरिः ३६ ।
व्रीहिबीजे यथा मूलं नालं पत्राङ्कुरौ तथा ।
काण्डकोषस्तु पुष्पं च क्षीरं तद्वच्च तण्डुलाः ३७ ।
तुषाः कणाश्च सन्तो वै यान्त्याविर्भावमात्मनः ।
प्ररोहहेतुसामग्र्यमासाद्य मुनिसत्तम ३८ ।
तथा कर्मस्वनेकेषु देवाद्याः समवस्थिताः ।
विष्णुशक्तिं समासाद्य प्ररोहमुपयान्ति वै ३९ ।
स च विष्णुः परं ब्रह्म यतः सर्वमिदं जगत् ।
जगच्च यो यत्र चेदं यस्मिंश्च लयमेष्यति ४० ।
तद्ब्रह्म तत्परं धाम सदसत्परमं पदम् ।
यस्य सर्वमभेदेन यतश्चैतच्चराचरम् ४१ ।
स एव मूलप्रकृतिर्व्यक्तरूपी जगच्च सः ।
तस्मिन्नेव लयं सर्वं याति तत्र च तिष्ठति ४२ ।
कर्त्ता क्रियाणां स च इज्यते क्रतुः स एवतत्कर्मफलं च तस्य ।
स्रुगादियत्साधनमप्यश्षॐ हरेर्न किञ्चिद्व्यतिरिक्तमस्ति ४३ ।
इति श्रीवुष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेंशे सप्तमोऽध्यायः ७।

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. VII.

Extent and situation of the seven spheres, viz. earth, sky, planets, Mahar-loka, Janaloka, Tapo-loka, and Satya-loka. Of the egg of Brahmá, and its elementary envelopes. Of the influence of the energy of Vishńu.

MAITREYA.--The sphere of the whole earth has been described to me by you, excellent Brahman, and I am now desirous to hear an account of the other spheres above the world, the Bhuvar-loka and the rest, and the situation and the dimensions of the celestial luminaries.

PARÁŚARA. The sphere of the earth (or Bhúr-loka), comprehending its oceans, mountains, and rivers, extends as far as it is illuminated by the rays of the sun and moon; and to the same extent, both in diameter and circumference, the sphere of the sky (Bhuvar-loka) spreads above it (as far upwards as to the planetary sphere, or Swar-loka) 1. The solar orb is situated a hundred thousand leagues from the earth; and that of the moon an equal distance from the sun. At the same interval above the moon occurs the orbit of all the lunar constellations. The planet Budha (Mercury) is two hundred thousand leagues above the lunar mansions. Śukra (Venus) is at the same distance from Mercury. Angáraka (Mars) is as far above Venus; and the priest of the gods (Vrihaspati, or Jupiter) as far from Mars: whilst Saturn (Sani) is two hundred and fifty thousand leagues beyond Jupiter. The sphere of the seven Rishis (Ursa Major) is a hundred thousand leagues above Saturn; and at a similar height above the seven Rishis is Dhruva (the pole-star), the pivot or axis of the whole planetary circle. Such, Maitreya, is the elevation of the three spheres (Bhúr, Bhuvar, Swar) which form the region of the consequences of works. The region of works is here (or in the land of Bhárata) 2.

p. 213

Above Dhruva, at the distance of ton million leagues, lies the sphere of saints, or Mahar-loka, the inhabitants of which dwell in it throughout a Kalpa, or day of Brahmá. At twice that distance is situated Janaloka, where Sanandana and other pure-minded sons of Brahmá, reside. At four times the distance, between the two last, lies the Tapo-loka (the sphere of penance), inhabited by the deities called Vaibhrájas, who are unconsumable by fire. At six times the distance (or twelve Crores, a hundred and twenty millions of leagues) is situated Satya-loka, the sphere of truth, the inhabitants of which never again know death 3.

p. 214

Wherever earthy substance exists, which may be traversed by the feet, that constitutes the sphere of the earth, the dimensions of which I have already recounted to you. The region that extends from the earth to the sun, in which the Siddhas and other celestial beings move, is the atmospheric sphere, which also I have described. The interval between the sun and Dhruva, extending fourteen hundred thousand leagues, is called by those who are acquainted with the system of the universe the heavenly sphere. These three spheres are termed transitory: the three highest, Jana, Tapa, and Satya, are styled durable 4: Maharloka, as situated between the two, has also a mixed character; for although it is deserted at the end of the Kalpa, it is not destroyed. These seven spheres, together with the Pátálas, forming the extent of the whole world, I have thus, Maitreya, explained to you.

The world is encompassed on every side and above and below by the shell of the egg of Brahmá, in the same manner as the seed of the wood-apple 5 is invested by its rind. Around the outer surface of the shell flows water, for a space equal to ten times the diameter of the world. The waters, again, are encompassed exteriorly by fire; fire by air; and air by Mind; Mind by the origin of the elements (Ahankára); and that by Intellect: each of these extends ten times the breadth of that which

p. 215

it encloses; and the last is encircled by the chief Principle, Pradhána 6, which is infinite, and its extent cannot be enumerated: it is therefore called the boundless and illimitable cause of all existing things, supreme nature, or Prakriti; the cause of all mundane eggs, of which there are thousands and tens of thousands, and millions and thousands of millions, such as has been described 7. Within Pradhána resides Soul, diffusive, conscious, and self-irradiating, as fire is inherent in flint 8, or sesamum oil in its seed. Nature (Pradhána) and soul (Pumán) are both of the character of dependants, and are encompassed by the energy of Vishńu, which is one with the soul of the world, and which is the cause of the separation of those two (soul and nature) at the period of dissolution; of their aggregation in the continuance of things; and of their combination at the season of creation 9. In the same manner as the wind ruffles the surface of the water in a hundred bubbles, which of themselves are inert, so the energy of Vishńu influences the world, consisting of inert nature and soul. Again, as a tree, consisting of root, stem, and branches, springs from a primitive seed, and produces other seeds, whence grow other trees analogous to the first in species, product, and origin, so from the first unexpanded germ (of nature, or Pradhána) spring Mahat (Intellect)

p. 216

and the other rudiments of things; from them proceed the grosser elements; and from them men and gods, who are succeeded by sons and the sons of sons. In the growth of a tree from the seed, no detriment occurs to the parent plant, neither is there any waste of beings by the generation of others. In like manner as space and time and the rest are the cause of the tree (through the materiality of the seed), so the divine Hari is the cause of all things by successive developements (through the materiality of nature) 10. As all the parts of the future plant, existing in the seed of rice, or the root, the culm, the leaf, the shoot, the stem, the bud, the fruit, the milk, the grain, the chaff, the ear, spontaneously evolve when they are in approximation with the subsidiary means of growth (or earth and water), so gods, men, and other beings, involved in many actions (or necessarily existing in those states which are the consequences of good or evil acts), become manifested only in their full growth, through the influence of the energy of Vishńu.

This Vishńu is the supreme spirit (Brahma), from whence all this world proceeds, who is the world, by whom the world subsists, and in whom it will be resolved. That spirit (or Brahma) is the supreme state of Vishńu, which is the essence of all that is visible or invisible; with which all that is, is identical; and whence all animate and inanimate existence is derived. He is primary nature: he, in a perceptible form, is the world: and in him all finally melts; through him all things endure. He is the performer of the rites of devotion: he is the rite: he is the fruit which it bestows: he is the implements by which it is performed. There is nothing besides the illimitable Hari.

Translator’s notes (10)
  1. Bhúr-loka, the terrestrial sphere, is earth and the lower regions; from thence to the sun is the Bhuvar-loka, or atmospheric sphere; and from the sun to Dhruva is the Swar-loka, or heaven; as subsequently explained in the text, and in other Puráńas.

  2. A similar account of the situations and distances of the planets occurs in the Padma, Kúrma, and Váyu Puráńas. The Bhágavata has one or two varieties, but they are of no great importance.

  3. An account of these Lokas is met with only in a few of the Puráńas, and is not much more detailed in them than in our text. The Váyu is most circumstantial. According to that authority, Mahar, which is so called from a mystical term Maha, is the abode of the Gańadevas, the Yámas and others, who are the regents or rulers of the Kalpa, the Kalpádhikáris they are so designated also in the Kúrma. The Káśí Khańd́a refers the name to Mahas, 'light,' the sphere being invested with radiance. Its inhabitants are also called lords of the Kalpa: but the commentator explains this to denote Bhrigu and the other patriarchs, whose lives endure for a day of Brahmá. The different accounts agree in stating, that when the three lower spheres are consumed by fire, Mahar-loka is deserted by its tenants, who repair to the next sphere, or Jana-loka. Jana-loka, according to the Váyu, is the residence of the Rishis and demigods during the night of Brahmá, and is termed Jana because the patriarchs are the progenitors of mankind. The Káśí Khańd́a agrees with the Vishńu in peopling it with Sanandana and the other ascetic sons of Brahmá, and with Yogis like themselves. These are placed by the Váyu in the Tapo-loka, and they and the other sages, and the demigods, after repeated appearances in the world, become at last Vairájas in the Brahmá or Satya loka. After many divine ages of residence there with Brahmá, they are, along with him, absorbed, at the end of his existence into the indiscrete. The commentator on the Káśí Khańd́a explains Vairája to mean 'relating to, or derived from, Brahmá or Viráj.' The Vairájas are there, as in the Vishńu Puráńa, placed in the Tapo-loka, and are explained to be ascetics, mendicants, anchorets, and penitents, who have completed a course of rigorous austerities. It maybe doubted, however, if the Pauráńiks have very precise notions regarding these spheres and their inhabitants, The Puráńas of a decidedly sectarial character add other and higher worlds to the series. Thus the Kúrma identifies Brahmá-loka with Vishńu-loka, and has a Rudra-loka above it. The Śiva places Vishńu-loka above Brahmá-loka, and Rudra-loka above that. In p. 214 the Káśí Khańd́a as we have, instead of those two, Vaikuntha and Kailása, as the lofty worlds of Vishńu and Śiva; whilst the Brahma Vaivartta has above all a Go-loka, a world or heaven of cows and Krishńa. These are all evidently additions to the original system of seven worlds, in which we have probably some relation to the seven climates of the ancients, the seven stages or degrees of the earth of the Arabs, and the seven heavens of the Mohammedans, if not to the seven Amshaspends of the Parsis. Seven, suggested originally perhaps by the seven planets, seems to have been a favourite number with various nations of antiquity. Amongst the Hindus it was applied to a variety of sacred or mythological objects, which are enumerated in a verse in the Hanumán Nátaka. Ráma is described there as piercing seven palm-trees with an arrow, on which other groups of seven take fright, as the seven steeds of the sun, the seven spheres, Munis, seas, continents, and mothers of the gods.

  4. Kritika and Akritika; literally 'made and unmade:' the former being renewed every Kalpa, the latter perishing only at the end of Brahmá's life.

  5. Of the Kapittha (Feronia Elephantum).

  6. See before the order in which the elements are evolved (p. 14).

  7. The followers of Anaximander and Democritus taught "an ἀπειρία κόσμων 'an infinity of worlds;' and that not only successive in that space which this world of ours is conceived now to occupy, in respect of the infinity of past and future time, but also a contemporary infinity of coexistent worlds, at all times, throughout endless and unbounded space." Intellect. System, I. 303.

  8. Literally 'in wood,' the attrition of two pieces of which does not create, but developes, their latent heat and flame.

  9. Thus in Scipio's dream the divinity is made the external limit of the universe: "Novem tibi orbibus vel potius globis connexa sunt omnia, quorum unus est cælestis externus qui reliquos omnes complectitur, summus ipse deus arcens et continens ceteros:" which Macrobius explains as to be understood of the Supreme First Cause of all things, only in respect of his supremacy over all, and from his comprehending as well as creating all things, and being regarded as the soul of the world: "Quod et virtutes omnes, quæ illam primæ omnipotentiam summitates sequuntur, aut ipse faciat aut ipse contineat: ipsam denique Jovem veteres vocaverunt, et apud theologos Jupiter est mundi anima." In Somn. Scip. c. XVII.

  10. The two passages in parentheses are the additions of the commentator, intended to explain how the deity is the material cause of the world. He is not so of his own essence, not so immediately, but through the interposition of Pradhána: 'As however he is the source of Prakriti, he must be considered the material as well as immaterial cause of being.'

II.8Book II, Chapter 8 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीपराशर उवाच
व्याख्यातमेतद्ब्रह्माण्डसंस्थानं तव सुव्रत
ततः प्रमाणसंस्थाने सूर्यादीनां शृणुष्व मे १
योजनानां सहस्राणि भास्करस्य रथो नव
ईषादण्डस्तथैवास्य द्विगुणो मुनिसत्तम २
सार्धकोटिस्तथा सप्त नियुतान्यधिकानि वै
योजनानां तु तस्याक्षस्तत्र चक्रं प्रतिष्ठितम् ३
त्रिनाभिमति पञ्चारे षण्णेमिन्यक्षयात्मके
संवत्सरमये कृत्स्नं कालचक्रं प्रतिष्ठितम् ४
हयाश्च सप्तच्छन्दांसि तेषां नामानि मे शृणु
गायत्री च बृहत्युष्णिग्जगती त्रिष्टुभेव च
अनुष्टुप्पंक्तिरित्युक्ता छंदांसि हरयो रवेः ५
चत्वारिंशत्सहस्रणिद्वितीयोऽक्षो विवस्वतः
पञ्चान्यानि तु सार्धानि स्यन्दनस्य महामते ६
अक्षप्रमाणमुभयोः प्रमाणं तद्युगार्द्धयो
ह्रस्वोक्षस्तद्युगार्द्धेन ध्रुवाधारो रथस्य वै
द्वितीयेक्षे तु तच्चक्रं संस्थितं मानसाचले ७
मानसोत्तरशैलस्य पूर्वतो वासवी पुरी
दक्षिणे तु यमस्यान्याप्रतीच्यां वरुणस्य च
उत्तरेण च सोमस्य तासां नामानि मे शृणु ८
वस्वौकसारा शक्रस्य याम्या संयमनी तथा
पुरी सुखाजलेशस्य सोमस्य च विभावरी ९
काष्ठां गतो दक्षिणतः क्षिप्तेषुरिव सर्पति
मैत्रेय भगवान्भानुर्ज्योतिषां चक्रसंयुतः १०
अहोरात्रव्यवस्थानकारणं भगवान्रविः
देवयानः परः पन्था योगिनां क्लेशसंक्षये ११
दिवसस्य रविर्मध्ये सर्वकालं व्यवस्थितः
सर्वद्वीपेषु मैत्रेय निशार्द्धस्य च सन्मुखः १२
उदयास्तमने चैव सर्वकालं तु सम्मुखे
विदिशासु त्वश्षोआ!सु तथा ब्रह्मन् दिशासु च १३
यैर्यत्र दृश्यते भास्वान्स तेषामुदयः स्मृतः
तिरोभावं च यत्रैति तत्रैवास्तमनं रवेः १४
नैवास्तमनमर्कस्य नोदयः सर्वदा सतः
उदयास्तमनाख्यं हि दर्शनादर्शनं रवेः १५
शक्रादीनां पुरे तिष्ठन् स्पृशत्येष पुरत्रयम्
विकोणौ द्वौ विकोणस्थस्त्रीन् कोणान्द्वे पुरे तथा १६
उदितो वर्द्धमानाभिरामध्याह्नात्तपन्रविः
ततः परं ह्रसन्तीभिर्गोभिरस्तं नियच्छति १७
उदयास्तमनाभ्यां च स्मृते पूर्वापरे दिशौ
यावत्पुरस्तात्तपति तावत्पृष्ठे च पार्श्वयोः १८
ऋतेऽमरगिरेर्मेरोरुपरि ब्रह्मणः सभाम्
येये मरीचयोर्कस्य प्रयान्ति ब्रह्मणः सभाम्
तेते निरस्तास्तद्भासा प्रतीपमुपयान्ति वै १९
तस्माद्दिश्युत्तरस्यां वै दिवारात्रिः सदैव हि
सर्वेषां द्वीपवर्षाणां मेरुरुत्तरतो यतः २०
प्रभा विवस्वतो रात्रावस्तं गच्छति भास्करे
विशत्यग्निमतो रात्रौ वह्निर्दूरात्प्रकाशते २१
वह्नेः प्रभा तथा भानुर्दिनेष्वाविशति द्विज
अतीव वह्निसंयोगादतः सूर्यः प्रकाशते २२
तेजसी भास्कराग्नेये प्रकाशोष्णस्वरूपिणी
परस्परानुप्रवेशादाप्यायेते दिवानिशम् २३
दक्षिणोत्तरभूम्यर्द्धे समुत्तिष्ठति भास्करे
अहोरात्रं विशत्यम्भस्तमः प्राकाश्यशीलवत् २४
आताम्रा हि भवत्यापो दिवानक्तप्रवेशनात्
दिनं विशति चैवांभो भास्करेस्तमुपेयुषि
तस्माच्छुक्ला भवन्त्यापो नक्तमह्नः प्रवेशनात् २५
एवं पुष्करमध्येन यदा याति दिवाकरः
त्रिंशद्भागस्तु मेदिन्यास्तदा मौहूर्त्तिकी गतिः २६
कुलालचक्रपर्यन्ते भ्रमन्नेष दिवाकरः
करोत्यहस्तथा रात्रिं विमुञ्चन्मेदिनीं द्विजः २७
अयनस्योत्तरस्यादौ मकरं याति भास्करः
ततः कुम्भं च मीनं च राशो! राश्यंतरं द्विज २८
त्रिष्वेतेष्वथ भुक्तेषु ततो वैषुवतीं गतिम्
प्रयाति सविता कुर्वन्नहोरात्रं ततः समम् २९
ततो रात्रिः क्षयं याति वर्द्धतेऽनुदिनं दिनम् ३०
ततश्च मिथुनस्यान्ते परां काष्ठामुपागतः
राशिं कर्कटकं प्राप्य कुरुते दक्षिणायनम् ३१
कुलालचक्रपर्यंतो यथाशीघ्रं प्रवर्त्तते
दक्षिणप्रक्रमे सूर्यस्तथा शीघ्रं प्रवर्त्तते ३२
अतिवेगितया कालं वायुवेगबलाच्चरन्
तस्मात्प्रकृष्टां भूमिं तु कालेनाल्पेन गच्छति ३३
सूर्यो द्वादशभिः शैघ्र्यानमुहूर्त्ते दक्षिणायने
त्रयोदशार्द्धमृक्षाणामह्ना तु चरति द्विज
मुहूर्त्तैस्तावदृक्षाणि नक्तमष्टादशैश्चरन् ३४
कुलालचक्रमध्यस्थो यथा मन्दं प्रसर्पति
तथोदगयने सूर्यः सर्पते मन्दविक्रमः ३५
तस्माद्दीर्घेण कालेन भूमिमल्पां तु गच्छति
अष्टादशमुहूर्तं यदुत्तरायणपश्चिमम् ३६
अहर्भवति तच्चापि चरते मन्दविक्रमः ३७
त्रयोदशार्द्धमह्ना तु ऋक्षाणां चरते रविः
मुहूर्त्तैस्तावदृक्षाणि रात्रौ द्वादशभिश्चरन् ३८
अतो मन्दतरं नाभ्यां चक्रं भ्रमति वै यथा
मृत्पिण्ड इव मध्यस्थो ध्रुवो भ्रमति वै तथा ३९
कुलालचक्रनाभिस्तु यथा तत्रैव वर्तते
ध्रुवस्तथा हि मैत्रेय तत्रैव परिवर्तते ४०
उभयोः काष्ठयोर्मध्ये भ्रमतो मण्डलानि तु
दिवा नक्तं च सूर्यस्य मन्दा शीघ्रा च वै गतिः ४१
मन्दाह्नि यस्मिन्नयने शीघ्रा नक्तं तदा गतिः
शीघ्रा निशि यदा चास्य तदा मंदा दिवा गतिः ४२
एक प्रमाणमेवैष मार्गं याति दिवाकरः
अहोरात्रेण यो भुंक्ते समस्ता राशयो द्विज ४३
षडेव राशीन् यो भुंक्ते रात्रावन्यांश्च षड्दिवा ४४
राशिप्रमाणजनिता दीर्घह्रस्वात्मता दिने
तथा निशायां राशीनां प्रमाणैर्लघुदीर्घता ४५
दिनादेर्दिर्घह्रस्वत्वं तद्भोगेनैव जायते
उत्तरे प्रक्रमे शीघ्रा निशि मंदा गतिर्दिवा ४६
दक्षिणे त्वयने चैव विपरीतां विवस्वतः ४७
उषा रात्रिः समाख्याताव्युष्टिश्चाप्युच्यते दिनम्
प्रोच्यते च तथा संध्या उषाव्युष्ट्योर्यदन्तरम् ४८
संध्याकाले च संप्राप्ते रौद्रे परमदारुणे
मन्देहा राक्षसा घोराः सूर्यमिच्छिन्ति खादितुम् ४९
प्रजापतिकृतः शापस्तेषां मैत्रेय रक्षसाम्
अक्षयत्वं शरीराणां मरणं च दिने दिने ५०
ततः सूर्यस्य तैर्युद्धं भवत्यत्यन्तदारुणम्
ततो द्विजोत्तमास्तोयं संक्षिपन्ति महामुने ५१
ॐकारब्रह्मसंयुक्तं गायत्र्! या चाभिमन्त्रितम्
तेन दह्यन्ति ते पापा वज्रीभूतेन वारिणा ५२
अग्निहोत्रे हूयते या समन्त्रा प्रथमाहुतिः
सूर्योज्योतिः सहस्रांशु समा दीप्यति भास्करः ५३
ॐकारो भगवान्विष्णुस्त्रिधामा वचसां पतिः
तदुच्चारणतस्ते तु विनाशं यांति राक्षसाः ५४
वैष्णुवॐशः परः सूर्यो योन्तर्ज्योतिरसंप्लवम्
अभियायक ॐकारस्तस्य तत्प्रेरकं परम् ५५
तेन संप्रेरितं ज्योतिरॐकारेणाथ दीप्तिमत्
दहत्यश्षोरक्षांसि मन्देहाख्यान्यघानि वै ५६
तस्मान्नोल्लंघनं कार्यं संध्योपासनकर्मणः
स हन्ति सूर्यं सन्ध्याया नोपास्तिं कुरुते तु यः ५७
ततः प्रयाति भगवान्ब्राह्मणैरभिरक्षितः
वालखिल्यादिभिश्चैव जगतः पालनोद्यतः ५८
काष्ठा निमेषा दश पंच चैव त्रिंशच्च काष्ठा गणयेत्कलां च
त्रिंशत्कलश्चैव भवेन्मुहूर्तस्तैस्त्रिंशता रात्र्! यहनी समेते ५९
ह्रासवृद्धी त्वहर्भागैर्दिवसानां यथाक्रमम्
सन्ध्यामुहूर्त्तमात्रा वै ह्रासवृद्धौ समा स्मृता ६०
रेखाप्रभृत्यथादित्ये त्रिमुहूर्त्तगते रवौ
प्रातः स्मृतस्ततः कालो भागश्चाह्नः स पञ्चमः ६१
तस्मात्प्रातस्तनात्कालात्त्रिमुहूर्त्तस्तु सङ्गवः
मध्याह्नस्त्रिमुहूर्त्तस्तु तस्मात्कालात्तु सङ्गवात् ६२
तस्मान्माध्याह्निकात्कालादपराह्ण इति स्मृतः
त्रय एव मुहूर्त्तास्तु कालभागः स्मृतो बुधैः ६३
आपराह्णे व्यतीते तु कालः सायाह्न एव च
दशपञ्च मुहूर्तं वै मुहूर्तास्त्रय एव च ६४
दशपंच मुहूर्तं वै अहर्वैषुवतं स्मृतम् ६५
वर्द्धते ह्रसेत चैवाप्ययने दक्षिणोत्तरे
अहस्तु ग्रसते रात्रिं रात्रिर्ग्रसति वासरम् ६६
शरद्वसन्तयोर्मध्ये विषुवं तु विभाव्यते
तुलामेषगते भानौ समरात्रिदिनं तु तत् ६७
कर्कटावस्थिते भानौ दक्षिणायनमुच्यते
उत्तरायणमप्युक्तं मकरस्थे दिवाकरे ६८
त्रिंशन्मुहूर्तं कथितमहोरात्रं तु यन्मया
तानि पंचदश ब्रह्मन् पक्ष इत्यभिधीयते ६९
मासः पक्षद्वयेनोक्तो द्वौ मासौ चार्कजावृतुः
ऋतुत्रयं चाप्ययनं द्वेऽयने वर्षसंज्ञिते ७०
संवत्सरादयः पंच चतुर्मासविकल्पिताः
निश्चयः सर्वकालस्य युगमित्यभिधीयते ७१
संवत्सरस्तु प्रथमो द्वितीयः परिवत्सरः
इद्वत्सरस्तृतीयस्तु चतुर्थश्चानुवत्सरः
वत्सरः पंचमश्चात्र कालोयं युगसंज्ञितः ७२
यः श्वेतस्योत्तरः शैलः शृङ्गवानिति विश्रुतः
त्रीणि तस्य तु शृंगाणि मैरयं शृगवान्स्मृतः ७३
दक्षिणं चोत्तरं चैव मध्यं वैषुवतं तथा
शरद्वसंतयोर्मध्ये तद्भानुः प्रतिपद्यते
मेषादौ च तुलादौ च मैत्रेय विषुवं स्मृतम् ७४
तदा तुल्यमहोरात्रं करोति तिमिरापहः
दशपञ्च मुहूर्तं वै तदेतदुभयं स्मृतम् ७५
प्रथमे कृत्तिकाभागे यदा भास्वांस्तदा शशी
विशाखानां चतुर्थेंशो! मुने तिष्ठत्यसंशयम् ७६
विशाखानां यदा सूर्यश्चरत्यंशं तृतीयकम्
तदा चन्द्रं विजानीयात्कृत्तिकाशिरसि स्थितम् ७७
तदैव विषुवाख्योऽयं कालः पुण्योऽभिधीयते
तदा दानादि देयानि देवेभ्यः प्रयतात्मभिः ७८
ब्राह्मणेभ्यः पितृभ्यश्च मुखमेतत्तु दानजम्
दत्तदानस्तु विषुवे कृतकृत्योभिजायते ७९
अहोरात्रार्द्धमासा तु कलाः काष्ठाः क्षणास्तथा
पौर्णमासी तथा ज्ञेया अमावास्या तथैव च
सिनीवाली कुहूश्चैव एका चानुमतिस्तथा ८०
तपस्तपस्यौ मधुमाधवौ च शुक्रः शुचिश्चायनमुत्तरं स्यात्
नभोनभस्यौ च इषस्तथोर्जस्सहःसहस्याविति दक्षिणं तत् ८१
लोका लोकश्च यश्शैलः प्रागुक्तो भवतो मया
लोकपालास्तु चत्वारस्तत्र तिष्ठन्ति सुव्रताः ८२
सुधामा शङ्खपाच्चैव कर्दमस्यात्मजौ द्विज
हिरण्यरोमा चैवान्यश्चतुर्थः केकुमानपि ८३
निर्द्वन्द्वा निरभीमाना निस्तन्द्रा निष्परिग्रहाः
लोकपालाः स्थिता ह्येते लोकालोके चतुर्दिशम् ८४
उत्तरं पदगस्त्यस्य अजवीथ्याश्च दक्षिणम्
पितृयानः स वै पन्था वैश्वानरपथाद्बहिः ८५
तत्रासते महात्मान ऋषयो येऽग्निहोत्रिणः
भूतारम्भकृतं ब्रह्म शंसन्तो ऋत्विगुद्यताः
प्रारभन्ते तु ये लोकास्तेषां पन्थाः स दक्षिणः ८६
चलितं ते पुनर्ब्रह्म स्थापयन्ति युगेयुगे
सन्तत्या तपसा चैव मर्यादाभिः श्रुतेन च ८७
जायमानास्तु पूर्वे च पश्चिमानां गृहेषु वै
पश्चिमाश्चैव पूर्वेषां जायन्ते विधनेष्विह ८८
एवमावर्त्तमानास्ते तिष्ठन्ति नियतव्रताः
सवितुर्दक्षिणं मार्गं श्रिता ह्याचन्द्र तारकम् ८९
नागावीथ्युत्तरं यच्च सप्तर्षिभ्यश्च दक्षिणम्
उत्तरः सवितुः पंथा देवयानश्च स स्मृतः ९०
तत्र ते वासिनः सिद्धा विमला ब्रह्मचारिणः
सन्ततिं ते जुगुप्संति तस्मान्मृत्युर्जितश्च तैः ९१
अष्टाशीतिसहस्राणि मुनीनामूर्ध्वरेतसाम्
उदक्पन्थनमर्यम्णः स्थिता ह्याभूतसंप्लवम् ९२
ते संप्रयोगाल्लोभस्य मैथुनस्य च वर्जनात्
इच्छाद्वेषाप्रवृत्त्या च भूतारम्भविवर्जनात् ९३
पुनश्च कामासंयोगाच्छब्दादेर्दोषदर्शनात्
इत्येभिः कारणैः शुद्धास्तेमृतत्वं हि भेजिरे ९४
आभूतसंप्लवं स्थानममृतत्वं विभाव्यते
त्रैलोक्यस्थितिकालोयमपुनर्मार उच्यते ९५
ब्रह्महत्याश्वमेधाभ्यां पापपुण्यकृतो विधिः
आभूतसंप्लवान्तन्तु फलमुक्तं तयोर्द्विज ९६
यावन्मात्रे प्रदेशो! तु मैत्रेयावस्थितो ध्रुवः
क्षयमायाति तावत्तु भूमेराभूतसंप्लवात् ९७
ऊर्ध्वोत्तरमृषिभ्यस्तु ध्रुवो यत्र व्यवस्थितः
एतद्विष्णुपदं दिव्यं तृतीयं व्योम्नि भासुरम् ९८
निर्धूतदोषपङ्कानां यतीनां संयतात्मनाम्
स्थानं तत्परमं विप्र पुण्यपापरिक्षये ९९
अपुण्यपुण्योपरमे क्षीणाशेषाप्तिहेतवः
यत्र गत्वा न शोचन्ति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् १००
धर्मध्रुवाद्यास्तिष्ठन्ति यत्र ते लोकसाक्षिणः
तत्सार्ष्ट्योत्पन्नयोगर्धिस्तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् १०१
यत्रोतमेतत्प्रोतं च यद्भूतं सचराचरम्
भाव्यं य विश्वं मैत्रेय तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् १०२
दिवीव चक्षुराततं योगिनां तन्मयात्मनाम्
विवेकज्ञानदृष्टं च तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् १०३
यस्मिन्प्रतिष्ठितो भास्वान्मेढीभूतः स्वयं ध्रुवः
ध्रुवे च सर्वज्योतींषि ज्योतिष्वम्भोमुचो द्विज १०४
मेघेषु संगता वृष्टिर्वृष्टेः सृष्टेश्च पोषणम्
आप्यायनं च सर्वेषां देवादीनां महामुने १०५
ततश्चाज्याहुतिद्वारा पोषितास्ते हविर्भुजः
वृष्टेः कारणतां यांति भूतानां स्थितये पुनः १०६
एवमेतत्पदं विष्णोस्तृतीयममलात्मकम्
आधारभूतं लोकानां त्रयाणां वृष्टिकारणम् १०७
ततः प्रभवति ब्रह्मन्सर्वपापहरा सरित्
गंगा देवांगनांगानामनुलेपनपिञ्जरा १०८
वामपादाम्बुजांगुष्ठनखस्रोतोविनिर्गताम्
विष्णोर्बिभर्त्ति यां भक्त्या शिरसाहर्निशं ध्रुवः १०९
ततः सप्तर्षयो यस्याः प्राणायामपरायणाः
तिष्ठन्ति वीचिमालाभिरुह्यमानजटाजले ११०
वार्योघैः संततैर्यस्याः प्लावितं शशिमण्डलम्
भूयोधिकतरां कांतिं वहत्येतदुह क्षये १११
मेरुपृष्टे पतत्युच्चैर्निष्क्रांता शशिमण्डलात्
जगतः पावनार्थाय प्रयाति च चतुर्दिशम् ११२
सीता चालकनन्दा च चक्षुर्भद्रा च संस्थिता
एकैव या चतुर्भेदा दिग्भेदगतिलक्षणा ११३
भेदं चालकनन्दाख्यं यस्याः शर्वोपि दक्षिणाम्
दधार शिरसा प्रीत्या वर्षाणामधिकं शतम् ११४
शम्भोर्जटाकलापाच्च विनिष्क्रान्तास्थिशर्कराः
प्लावयित्वा दिवं निन्ये या पापान्सगरात्मजान् ११५
स्नातस्य सलिले यस्याः सद्यः पापं प्रणश्यति
अपूर्वपुण्यप्राप्तिश्च सद्यो मैत्रेय जायते ११६
दत्ताः पितृभ्यो यत्रापस्तनयैः श्रद्धयान्वितैः
समाशतं प्रयच्छंति तृप्तिं मैत्रेय दुर्लभाम् ११७
यस्यामिष्ट्वा महायज्ञैर्यज्ञेशं पुरुषोत्तमम्
द्विज भूपाः परां सिद्धिमवापुर्दिवि चेह च ११८
स्नानाद्विधूतपापाश्च यज्जलैर्यतयस्तथा
केशवासक्तमनसः प्राप्ता निर्वाणमुत्तमम् ११९
श्रुताऽभिलषिता दृष्टा स्पृष्टा पीताऽवगाहिता
या पावयति भूतानि कीर्तिता च दिनेदिने १२०
गंगागंगेति यैर्नाम योजनानां शतष्वपि
स्थितैरुच्चारितं हन्ति पापं जन्मत्रयार्जितम् १२१
यतः सा पावनायालं त्रयाणां जगतामपि
समुद्भूता परं तत्तु तृतीयं भगवत्पदम् १२२
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेंशो!ऽष्टमोऽध्यायः ८

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. VIII.

Description of the sun: his chariot; its two axles: his horses. The cities of the regents of the cardinal points. The sun's course: nature of his rays: his path along the ecliptic. Length of day and night. Divisions of time: equinoxes and solstices, months, years, the cyclical Yuga, or age of five years. Northern and southern declinations. Saints on the Lokáloka mountain. Celestial paths of the Pitris, gods, Vishńu. Origin of Gangá, and separation, on the top of Meru, into four great rivers.

PARÁŚARA.--Having thus described to you the system of the world in general, I will now explain to you the dimensions and situations of the sun and other luminaries.

The chariot of the sun is nine thousand leagues in length, and the pole is of twice that longitude 1; the axle is fifteen millions and seven hundred thousand leagues long 2; on which is fixed a wheel with three naves, five spokes, and six peripheries, consisting of the ever-during year; the whole constituting the circle or wheel of time 3. The chariot has another axle, which is forty-five thousand five hundred leagues long 4.

p. 218

[paragraph continues] The two halves of the yoke are of the same length respectively as the two axles (the longer and the shorter). The short axle, with the short yoke, are supported by the pole-star: the end of the longer axle, to which the wheel of the car is attached, moves on the Mánasa mountain 5. The seven horses of the sun's car are the metres of the Vedas, Gáyatrí, Vrihatí, Ushńih, Jayatí, Trisht́ubh, Anusht́ubh, and Pankti.

The city of Indra is situated on the eastern side of the Mánasottara mountain; that of Yama on the southern face; that of Varuńa on the west; and that of Soma on the north: named severally Vaswokasárá, Samyamaní, Mukhyá, and Vibhávarí 6.

The glorious sun, Maitreya, darts like an arrow on his southern course, attended by the constellations of the Zodiac. He causes the difference between day and night, and is the divine vehicle and path of the sages who have overcome the inflictions of the world. Whilst the sun, who is the discriminator of all hours, shines in one continent in midday, in the opposite Dwípas, Maitreya, it will be midnight: rising and setting are at all seasons, and are always (relatively) opposed in the different cardinal and intermediate points of the horizon. When the sun becomes visible to any people, to them he is said to rise; when he disappears from their

p. 219

view, that is called his setting. There is in truth neither rising nor setting of the sun, for he is always; and these terms merely imply his presence and his disappearance.

When the sun (at midday) passes over either of the cities of the gods, on the Mánasottara mountain (at the cardinal points), his light extends to three cities and two intermediate points: when situated in an intermediate point, he illuminates two of the cities and three intermediate. points (in either case one hemisphere). From the period of his rise the sun moves with increasing rays until noon, when he proceeds towards his setting with rays diminishing (that is, his heat increases or diminishes in proportion as he advances to, or recedes from, the meridian of any place). The east and west quarters are so called from the sun's rising and setting there 7. As far as the sun shines in front, so far he shines behind and on either hand, illuminating all places except the summit of Meru, the mountain of the immortals; for when his rays reach the court of Brahmá, which is there situated, they are repelled and driven back by the overpowering radiance which there prevails: consequently there is always the alternation of day and night, according as the divisions of the continent lie in the northern (or southern) quarter, or inasmuch as they are situated north (or south) of Meru 8.

p. 220

The radiance of the solar orb, when the sun has set, is accumulated in fire, and hence fire is visible at a greater distance by night than by day: during the latter a fourth of the rays of fire blend with those of the sun, and from their union the sun shines with greater intensity by day. Elemental light, and heat derived from the sun or from fire, blending with each other, mutually prevail in various proportions, both by day and night. When the sun is present either in the southern or the northern hemisphere, day or night retires into the waters, according as they are invaded by darkness or light: it is from this cause that the waters look dark by day, because night is within them; and they look white by night, because at the setting of the sun the light of day takes refuge in their bosom 9.

When the sun has travelled in the centre of Pushkara a thirtieth part of the circumference of the globe, his course is equal in time to one Muhúrtta 10; and whirling round like the circumference of the wheel of a potter, he distributes day and night upon the earth. In the commencement of his northern course, the sun passes to Capricornus, thence to Aquarius, thence to Pisces, going successively from one sign of the Zodiac to another. After he has passed through these, the sun attains his equinoctial movement (the vernal equinox), when he makes the day and night of equal duration. Thenceforward the length of the night decreases, and the day becomes longer, until the sun reaches the end of Gemini, when he pursues a different direction, and, entering Cancer, begins his declension to the south. As the circumference of a potter's

p. 221

wheel revolves most rapidly, so the sun travels rapidly on his southern journey: he flies along his path with the velocity of wind, and traverses a great distance in a short time. In twelve Muhúrttas he passes through thirteen lunar asterisms and a half during the day; and during the night he passes through the same distance, only in eighteen Muhúrttas. As the centre of the potter's wheel revolves more slowly than the circumference, so the sun in his northern path again revolves with less rapidity, and moves over a less space of the earth in a longer time, until, at the end of his northern route, the day is again eighteen Muhúrttas, and the night twelve; the sun passing through half the lunar mansions by day and by night in those periods respectively. As the lump of clay on the centre of the potter's wheel moves most slowly, so the polar-star, which is in the centre of the zodiacal wheel, revolves very tardily, and ever remains in the centre, as the clay continues in the centre of the wheel of the potter.

The relative length of the day or night depends upon the greater or less velocity with which the sun revolves through the degrees between the two points of the horizon. In the solstitial period, in which his diurnal path is quickest, his nocturnal is slowest; and in that in which he moves quick by night, he travels slowly by day. The extent of his journey is in either case the same; for in the course of the day and night he passes through all the signs of the Zodiac, or six by night, and the same number by day: the length and shortness of the day are measured by the extent of the signs; and the duration of day and night by the period which the sun takes to pass through them 11. In his northern

p. 222

declination the sun moves quickest by night, and slowest by day; in his southern declination the reverse is the case.

The night is called Ushá, and the day is denominated Vyusht́a, and the interval between them is called Sandhya. On the occurrence of the awful Sandhya, the terrific fiends termed Mandehas attempt to devour the sun; for Brahmá denounced this curse upon them, that, without the power to perish, they should die every day (and revive by night), and therefore a fierce contest occurs daily between them and the sun 12. At this season pious Brahmans scatter water, purified by the mystical Omkára, and consecrated by the Gáyatri 13; and by this water, as by a thunderbolt, the foul fiends are consumed. When the first oblation is offered with solemn invocations in the morning rite 14, the thousand-rayed deity shines forth with unclouded splendour. Omkára is Vishńu the mighty, the substance of the three Vedas, the lord of speech; and by its enunciation those Rákshasas are destroyed. The sun is a principal part of Vishńu, and light is his immutable essence, the active manifestation of which is excited by the mystic syllable Om. Light effused by the utterance of Omkára becomes radiant, and burns up entirely the Rákshasas called Mandehas. The performance of the Sandhya (the morning) sacrifice must never therefore be delayed, for he who neglects it is guilty of the murder of the sun. Protected thus by the Brahmans and the pigmy sages called Bálakhilyas, the sun goes on his course to give light to the world.

p. 223

Fifteen twinklings of the eye (Nimeshas) make a Kásht́há; thirty Kásht́hás, a Kalá; thirty Kalás, a Muhúrtta (forty-eight minutes); and thirty Muhúrttas, a day and night: the portions of the day are longer or shorter, as has been explained; but the Sandhyá is always the same in increase or decrease, being only one Muhúrtta 15. From the period that a line may be drawn across the sun (or that half his orb is visible) to the expiration of three Muhúrttas (two hours and twenty-four minutes), that interval is called Prátar (morning), forming a fifth portion of the day. The next portion, or three Muhúrttas from morning, is termed Sangava (forenoon): the three next Muhúrttas constitute mid-day: the afternoon comprises the next three Muhúrttas: the three Muhúrttas following are considered as the evening: and the fifteen Muhúrttas of the day are thus classed in five portions of three each. But the day consists of fifteen Muhúrttas only at the equinoxes, increasing or diminishing in number in the northern and southern declinations of the sun, when the day encroaches on the night, or the night upon the day. The equinoxes occur in the seasons of spring and autumn, when the sun enters the signs of Aries and Libra. When the sun enters Capricorn (the winter solstice), his northern progress commences; and his southern when he enters Cancer (the summer solstice).

Fifteen days of thirty Muhúrttas each are called a Paksha (a lunar fortnight); two of these make a month; and two months, a solar season; three seasons a northern or southern declination (Ayana); and those two compose a year. Years, made up of four kinds of months 16, are distinguished

p. 224

into five kinds; and an aggregate of all the varieties of time is termed a Yoga, or cycle. The years are severally called Samvatsara, Parivatsara, Idvatsara, Anuvatsara, and Vatsara. This is the time called a Yuga 17.

The mountain range that lies most to the north (in Bhárata-varsha) is called Śringaván (the horned), from its having three principal elevations (horns or peaks), one to the north, one to the south, and one in the centre; the last is called the equinoctial, for the sun arrives there in the middle of the two seasons of spring and autumn, entering the equinoctial points in the first degree of Aries and of Libra, and making day and night of equal duration, or fifteen Muhúrttas each. When the sun, most excellent sage, is in the first degree of the lunar mansion, Krittiká, and the moon is in the. fourth of Viśákhá, or when the sun is in the third

p. 225

degree of Viśákhá, and the moon is in the head of Krittiká (these positions being cotemporary with the equinoxes), that equinoctial season is holy (and is styled the Mahávishubha, or the great equinox) 18. At this time offerings are to be presented to the gods and to the manes, and gifts are to be made to the Brahmans by serious persons; for such donations are productive of happiness. Liberality at the equinoxes is always advantageous to the donor: and day and night; seconds, minutes, and hours; intercalary months; the day of full moon (Paurnamásí); the day of conjunction (Amávásya), when the moon rises invisible; the day when it is first seen (Śiniválí); the day when it first disappears (Kuhú); the day when the moon is quite round (Ráká); and the day when one digit is deficient (Anumati), are all seasons when gifts are meritorious.

The sun is in his northern declination in the months Tapas, Tapasya, Madhu, Mádhava, Śukra, and Śuchi; and in his southern in those of Nabhas, Nabhasya, Isha, Úrja, Sahas, Sahasya 19.

On the Lokáloka mountain, which I have formerly described to you,

p. 226

reside the four holy protectors of the world; or Sudháman and Sankhapád, the two sons of Kardama, and Hirańyaroman, and Ketumat 20. Unaffected by the contrasts of existence, void of selfishness, active, and unencumbered by dependants, they take charge of the spheres, themselves abiding on the four cardinal points of the Lokáloka mountain.

On the north of Agastya, and south of the line of the Goat, exterior to the Vaiswánara path, lies the road of the Pitris 21. There dwell the great

p. 227

[paragraph continues] Rishis, the offerers of oblations with fire, reverencing the Vedas, after whose injunctions creation commenced, and who were discharging the duties of ministrant priests: for as the worlds are destroyed and renewed, they institute new rules of conduct, and reestablish the interrupted ritual of the Vedas. Mutually descending from each other, progenitor springing from descendant, and descendant from progenitor, in the alternating succession of births, they repeatedly appear in different housed and races along with their posterity, devout practices and instituted observances, residing to the south of the solar orb, as long as the moon and stars endure 22.

The path of the gods lies to the north of the solar sphere, north of the Nágavithi 23, and south of the seven Rishis. There dwell the Siddhas, of subdued senses, continent and pure, undesirous of progeny, and therefore victorious over death: eighty-eight thousand of these chaste beings tenant the regions of the sky, north of the sun, until the destruction of the universe: they enjoy immortality, for that they are holy; exempt from covetousness and concupiscence, love and hatred; taking no part in the procreation of living beings, and detecting the unreality of the properties of elementary matter. By immortality is meant existence to the end of the Kalpa: life as long as the three regions (earth, sky, and heaven) last is called exemption from (reiterated) death 24. The consequences of acts of iniquity or piety, such as Brahmanicide or an Aśwamedha, endure for a similar period, or until the end of a Kalpa 25, when all within the interval between Dhruva and the earth is destroyed.

p. 228

The space between the seven Rishis and Dhruva 26, the third region of the sky, is the splendid celestial path of Vishńu (Vishńupada), and the abode of those sanctified ascetics who are cleansed from every soil, and in whom virtue and vice are annihilated. This is that excellent place of Vishńu to which those repair in whom all sources of pain are extinct, in consequence of the cessation of the consequences of piety or iniquity, and where they never sorrow more. There abide Dharma, Dhruva, and other spectators of the world, radiant with the superhuman faculties of Vishńu, acquired through religious meditation; and there are fastened and inwoven to all that is, and all that shall ever be, animate or inanimate. The seat of Vishńu is contemplated by the wisdom of the Yogis, identified with supreme light, as the radiant eye of heaven. In this portion of the heavens the splendid Dhruva is stationed, and serves for the pivot of the atmosphere. On Dhruva rest the seven great planets, and on them depend the clouds. The rains are suspended in the clouds, and from the rains come the water which is the nutriment and delight of all, the gods and the rest; and they, the gods, who are the receivers of oblations, being nourished by burnt-offerings, cause the rain to fall for the support of created beings. This sacred station of Vishńu, therefore, is the support of the three worlds, as it is the source of rain.

From that third region of the atmosphere, or seat of Vishńu, proceeds the stream that washes away all sin, the river Gangá, embrowned with the unguents of the nymphs of heaven, who have sported in her waters. Having her source in the nail of the great toe of Vishńu's left foot, Dhruva 27 receives her, and sustains her day and night devoutly on his head; and thence the seven Rishis practise the exercises of austerity in her waters, wreathing their braided locks with her waves. The orb of the moon, encompassed by her accumulated current, derives augmented lustre from her contact. Falling from on high, as she issues from the moon; she alights on the summit of Meru, and thence flows to the four

p. 229

quarters of the earth, for its purification. The Śítá, Alakanandá, Chakshu, and Bhadrá are four branches of but one river, divided according to the regions towards which it proceeds. The branch that is known as the Alakanandá was borne affectionately by Mahádeva, upon his head, for more than a hundred years, and was the river which raised to heaven the sinful sons of Sagara, by washing their ashes 28. The offences of any man who bathes in this river are immediately expiated, and unprecedented virtue is engendered. Its waters, offered by sons to their ancestors in faith for three years, yield to the latter rarely attainable gratification. Men of the twice-born orders, who offer sacrifice in this river to the lord of sacrifice, Purushottama, obtain whatever they desire, either here or in heaven. Saints who are purified from all soil by bathing in its waters, and whose minds are intent on Keśava, acquire thereby final liberation. This sacred stream, heard of, desired, seen, touched, bathed in, or hymned, day by day, sanctifies all beings; and those who, even at a distance of a hundred leagues, exclaim "Gangá, Gangá," atone for the sins committed during three previous lives. The place whence this river proceeds, for the purification of the three worlds, is the third division of the celestial regions, the seat of Vishńu 29.

Translator’s notes (29)
  1. The sun's car is 10.000 Yojanas broad, and as many deep, according to the Váyu and Matsya. The Bhágavata makes it thirty-six hundred thousand long, and one fourth that broad. The Linga agrees with the text.

  2. There is no great difference in this number in other accounts. The length of this axle, which extends from Meru to Mánasa, is nearly equal to the semidiameter of the earth, which, according to the Matsya P., is 18.950.000 Yojanas.

  3. The three naves are the three divisions of the day, morning, noon, and night; the five spokes are the five cyclic years; and the six peripheries are the six seasons. The Bhágavata explains the three naves to be three periods of the year, of four months each, and gives twelves spokes as types of the twelve months. The Váyu, Matsya, and Bhavishya Puráńas enter into much more detail. According to them, the parts of the wheel are the same as above described: the body of the car is the year; its upper and lower half are the two solstices; Dharma is its flag; Artha and Káma the pins of the yoke and axle; night is its fender; Nimeshas form its floor; a moment is the axle-tree; an instant the pole; minutes are its attendants; and hours its harness.

  4. This shorter axle is, according to the Bhágavata, one fourth of the longer.

  5. We are to understand here, both in the axle and yoke, two levers, one horizontal, the other perpendicular. The horizontal arm of the axle has a wheel at one end; the other extremity is connected with the perpendicular arm. To the horizontal arm of the yoke are harnessed the horses; and its inner or right extremity is secured to the perpendicular. The upper ends of both perpendiculars are supposed to be attached to Dhruva, the pole-star, by two aerial cords, which are lengthened in the sun's southern course, and shortened in his northern; and retained by which to Dhruva, as to a pivot, the wheel of the car traverses the summit of the Mánasottara mountain on Pushkara-dwípa, which runs like a ring round the several continents and oceans. The contrivance is commonly compared to an oil mill, and was probably suggested by that machine as constructed in India. As the Mánasottara mountain is but 50.000 leagues high, and Meru 84.000, whilst Dhruva is 1500.000, both levers are inclined at obtuse angles to the nave of the wheel and each other. In images of the sun, two equal and semicircular axles connect a central wheel with the sides of the car.

  6. In the Linga the city of Indra is called Amarávati; and in it and the Váyu that of Varuńa is termed Sukhá.

  7. The terms Púrva and Apara mean properly 'before and behind;' but 'before' naturally denotes the east, either because men, according to a text of the Vedas, spontaneously face, as if to welcome the rising sun, or because they are enjoined by the laws so to do. When they face the rising sun, the west is of course behind them. The same circumstance determines the application of the term Dakshina, properly 'right,' δεξιὸς, or 'dexterum,' to the south. Uttara, 'other' or 'last,' necessarily implies the north.

  8. This is rather obscure, but it is made out clearly enough in the commentary, and in the parallel passages in the Váyu, Matsya, Linga, Kúrma, and Bhágavata. The sun travels round the world, keeping Meru always on his right: to the spectator who fronts him therefore, as he rises, Meru must be always on the north; and as the sun's rays do not penetrate beyond the centre of the mountain, the regions beyond, or to the north of it, must be in darkness; whilst those on the south of it must be in light: north and south being relative, not absolute terms, depending upon the position of the spectator with regard to the sun and to Meru. So the commentator: ###. p. 220 It was probably through some misapprehension of this doctrine that Major Wilford asserted, "by Meru the Pauráńiks understand in general the north pole, but the context of the Puráńas is against this supposition." As. Res. VIII. 286. There is no inconsistency, however, in Meru's being absolutely in the centre of the world, and relatively north to the inhabitants of the several portions, to all of whom the east is that quarter where the sun first appears, and the other quarters are thereby regulated.

  9. Similar notions are contained in the Váyu.

  10. The sun travels at the rate of one-thirtieth of the earth's circumference in a Muhúrtta, or 31.50.000 Yojanas; making the total 9 crores and 45 lakhs, or 9.45.00.000; according to the Váyu, Lingo, and Matsya Puráńas.

  11. This passage, which is somewhat at variance with the general doctrine, that the length of the day depends upon the velocity of the sun's course, and which has not been noticed in any other Pauráńik text, is defended by the commentator, upon the authority of the Jyotishśástra, or astronomical writings. According to them, he asserts, the signs of the Zodiac are of different extent. Aquarius, Pisces, and Aries are the shortest; Taurus, Capricornus, and Gemini are something longer; Leo and Scorpio longer still; and the remaining four the longest of all. According to the six which the sun traverses, the day or night will be the longer or shorter. The text is, ###. The apparent contradiction may however be reconciled by understanding the sun's slow motion, and the length of a sign, to be equivalent terms.

  12. The same story occurs in the Váyu, with the addition that the Mandehas are three crores in number. It seems to be an ancient legend, imperfectly preserved in some of the Puráńas.

  13. The sacred syllable Om has been already described (p. 1. n. 1). The Gayatrí, or holiest verse of the Vedas, not to be uttered to ears profane, is a short prayer to the sun, identified as the supreme, and occurs in the tenth hymn of the fourth section of the third Asht́aka of the Sanhitá of the Rig-veda: 'We meditate on that excellent light of the divine sun: may he illuminate our minds.' Such is the fear entertained of profaning this text, that copyists of the Vedas not unfrequently refrain from transcribing it, both in the Sanhitá and Bháshya.

  14. Or, in the text, with the prayer that commences with the words Súrya jyotir, 'That which is in the sun (or light) is adorable,' &c. The whole prayer is given in Colebrooke's account of the religious ceremonies of the Hindus. As. Res. V. 355.

  15. But this comprehends the two Sandhyás, 'morning and evening twilight.' Two Náris, or half a Muhúrtta before sunrise, constitute the morning Sandhyá; and the same interval after sunset the evening. Sandhya, meaning 'junction,' is so termed as it is the juncture or interval between darkness and light; as in the Váyu and Matsya: ###.

  16. The four months are named in the Váyu, and are, 1. the Saura, or solar-sydereal, consisting of the sun's passage through a sign of the Zodiac: 2. the Saumya or Chándra or lunar month, comprehending thirty lunations or Tithis, and reckoned most usually from new moon to new moon, though sometimes from full moon to full moon: 3. the Sávana or solar month, containing thirty days of sunrise and sunset: and 4. the Nákshatra or lunar p. 224 asterismal month, which is the moon's revolution through the twenty-eight lunar mansions.

  17. The five years forming this Yuga, or cycle, differ only in denomination, being composed of the months above described, with such Malamásas, or intercalary months, as may be necessary to complete the period, according to Vriddha Garga. The cycle comprehends, therefore, sixty solar- sydereal months of 1800 days; sixty-one solar months, or 1830 days; sixty-two lunar months, or 1860 lunations; and sixty-seven lunar-asterismal months, or 1809 such days. Col. Warren, in his Kála Sankalitá, considers these years to be severally cycles. "In the cycle of sixty," he observes, "are contained five cycles of twelve years, each supposed equal to one year of the planet (Jupiter). I only mention this cycle because I found it mentioned in some books; but I know of no nation nor tribe that reckons time after that account. The names of the five cycles, or Yugs, are, 1. Samvatsara, 2. Parivatsara, 3. Idvatsara, 4. Anuvatsara, 5. Udravatsara. The name of each year is determined from the Nákshatra, in which Vrihaspati sets and rises heliacally, and they follow in the order of the lunar months." K. S. 212. It may be reasonably doubted, however, if this view be correct; and the only connexion between the cycle of five years and that of Vrihaspati may be the multiplication of the former by the latter (5 x 12), so as to form the cycle of sixty years: a cycle based, the commentator remarks, upon the conjunction (Yuga) of the sun and moon in every sixtieth year. The original and properly Indian cycle, however, is that of five years, as Bentley remarks. "The astronomers of this period (1181 B. C.) framed a cycle of five years for civil and religious ceremonies." Ancient and modern Hindu Astronomy. It is in fact, as Mr. Colebrooke states, the cycle of the Vedas, described in the Jyotish, or astronomical sections, and specified in the institutes of Paráśara as the basis of calculation for larger cycles. As. Res. VIII. 470.

  18. Reference is here made apparently, though indistinctly, to those positions of the planets which indicate, according to Bentley, the formation of the lunar mansions by Hindu astronomers, about 1424 B. C. Hindu Astronomy, p. 3 and 4. The Váyu and Linga Puráńas specify the positions of the other planets at the same time, or the end, according to the former, of the Chákshusha Manwantara. At that time the sun was in Viśákhá, the moon in Krittiká, Venus in Pushyá, Jupiter in Púrvaphalguní, Mars in Áshád́há, Budha in Dhanisht́há, Śani in Revatí, Ketu in Ásleshá, and Ráhu in Bharaní. There are differences between some of these and the positions cited by Bentley, but most of them are the same. He considers them to have been observations of the occultations of the moon by the planets, in the respective lunar mansions, 1424-5 B. C. According to the Váyu, these positions or origins of the planets are from the Vedas: ###. The Linga, less accurately perhaps, reads ### referring it to the works of law.

  19. These are the names of the months which occur in the Vedas, and belong to a system now obsolete, as was noticed by Sir Wm. Jones. As. Res. III. 258. According to the classification of the text, they correspond severally with the lunar months Mágha, Phálguna, Chaitra, Vaiśákha, Jyesht́ha, Áshárha, or from December to June; and with Śrávańa, Bhádra, Áswina, Kártika, Agraháyana, and Pausha, from July to December. From this order of the two series of the months, as occurring in the Vedas, Mr. Colebrooke infers, upon astronomical computations, their date to be about fourteen centuries prior to the Christian era. As. Res. VII. 283.

  20. The Váyu has the same names, but ascribes a different descent to the first, making Sudháman the son of Viraja. Sankhapád is the son of Kardama: the other two are the sons of Parjanya and Rajas, consistently with the origin ascribed to these Lokapálas in the patriarchal genealogies of that Puráńa (see p. 83).

  21. Allusion is here made to some divisions of the celestial sphere which are not described in any other part of the text. The fullest, but still in some respects a confused and partly inaccurate account is given in the Matsya Puráńa; but a more satisfactory description occurs in the comment on the Bhágavata, there cited from the Váyu, but not found in the copies consulted on the present occasion. According to those details, the path (Márga) of the sun and other planets amongst the lunar asterisms is divided into three portions or Avasht́hánas, northern, southern, and central, called severally Airávata, Járadgava (Ajagava, Matsya P.), and Vaiswánara. Each of these, again, is divided into three parts or Víthis: those of the northern portion are termed Nágavithi, Gajavíthi, and Airávati; those of the centre are Árshabhí Govíthí, and Járadgaví; and those of the south are named Ajavíthí, Mrígavithí, and Vaiswánarí. Each of these Víthis comprises three asterisms.

    Nágavíthi

    Aswiní
    Bharańí
    Krittiká

    Gajavíthí

    Rohiní
    Mrigaśiras
    Ardrá

    Airávati

    Punarvasu
    Pushyá
    Ásleshá

    Árshabhí

    Maghá
    Púrvaphalguní
    Uttaraphalguní

    Govíthí

    Hastá
    Chitrá
    Swáti

    Járadgaví

    Viśákhá
    Anurádhá
    Jyesht́há

    Ajavíthi

    Múlá
    Purváshád́há
    Uttaráshád́há

    Mrigavíthí

    Śravańá
    Dhanisht́há
    Satábhishá

    Vaiswánarí

    Púrva Bhádrapadá
    Uttara Bhádrapadá
    Revatí.

    Nágavíthi

    Aswiní
    Bharańí
    Krittiká

    Gajavíthí

    Rohiní
    Mrigaśiras
    Ardrá

    Airávati

    Punarvasu
    Pushyá
    Ásleshá

    Árshabhí

    Maghá
    Púrvaphalguní
    Uttaraphalguní

    Govíthí

    Hastá
    Chitrá
    Swáti

    Járadgaví

    Viśákhá
    Anurádhá
    Jyesht́há

    Ajavíthi

    Múlá
    Purváshád́há
    Uttaráshád́há

    Mrigavíthí

    Śravańá
    Dhanisht́há
    Satábhishá

    Vaiswánarí

    Púrva Bhádrapadá
    Uttara Bhádrapadá
    Revatí.

    [paragraph continues] See also As. Res. IX. table of Nakshatras, 346. Agastya is Canopus; and the line of the goat, or Ajavíthi, comprises asterisms which contain stars in Scorpio and Sagittarius.

  22. A marginal note in one MS. explains the phrase of the text, ### to signify as far as to the moon and stars; but the Pitri yána, or path of the Pitris, lies amongst the asterisms; and, according to the Pauráńik system of the heavens, it is not clear what could be meant by its being bounded by the moon and stars. The path south of the solar orb is, according to the Vedas, that of smoke or darkness.

  23. The stars of the Nágavíthi are those of Aries and Taurus; and by the seven Rishis we are here to understand Ursa Major.

  24. This, according to the Vedas, is all that is to be understood of the immortality of the gods: they perish at the period of universal dissolution.

  25. That is, generally as affecting created beings, not individuals, whose acts influence their several successive births.

  26. From Ursa Major to the polar star.

  27. The popular notion is, that Śiva or Mahádeva receives the Ganges on his head; but this, as subsequently explained, is referred, by the Vaishńavas at least, to the descent of the Alakanandá, or Ganges of India, not to the celestial Ganges.

  28. Or, in other words, 'flows into the sea.' The legend here alluded to is more fully detailed in a subsequent book.

  29. The situation of the source of the Ganges of heaven identifies it with the milky way.

II.9Book II, Chapter 9 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीपारशर उवाच
तारामयं भगवतः शिशुमाराकृति प्रभोः ।
दिवि रूपं हरेर्यत्तु तस्य पुच्छे स्थितो ध्रुवः ॥ २,९.१ ॥
सैष भ्रमन् भ्रामयति चन्द्रादित्यादिकान् ग्रहान् ।
भ्रमन्तमनु तं यान्ति नक्षत्राणि च चक्रवत् ॥ २,९.२ ॥
सूर्याचन्द्रमसौ तारा नक्षत्राणि ग्रहैः सह ।
वातानीकमयैर्बन्धैर्ध्रुवे बद्धानि तानि वै ॥ २,९.३ ॥
शिशुमाराकृति प्रोक्तं यद्रूपं ज्योतिषां दिवि ।
नारायणोऽयनं धाम्नां तस्याधारः स्वयं हृदि ॥ २,९.४ ॥
उत्तानपादपुत्रस्तु तमाराध्य जगत्पतिम् ।
स तारा शिशुमारस्य ध्रुवः पुच्छे व्यवस्थितः ॥ २,९.५ ॥
आधारः शिशुमारस्य सर्वाध्यक्षो जनार्दनः ।
ध्रुवस्य शिशुमारस्तु ध्रुवे भानुर्व्यवस्थितः ॥ २,९.६ ॥
तदाधारं जगच्चेदं सदेवासुरमानुषम् ॥ २,९.७ ॥
येन विप्रविधानेन तन्ममैकमनाः शृणु ।
विवस्वानष्टभिर्मासैरादायापो रसात्मिकाः ।
वर्षत्यम्बुततश्चान्नमन्नादप्यखिलं जगत् ॥ २,९.८ ॥
विवस्वानंशुभिस्तीक्ष्णैरादाय जगतो जलम् ।
सोमं पुष्णात्यथेन्दुश्च वायुनाडीमयैर्दिवि ।
नालैर्विक्षिपतेऽभ्रेषु धूमाग्न्यनिलमूर्तिषु ॥ २,९.९ ॥
न भ्रश्यन्ति यतस्तेभ्यो जलान्यभ्राणि तान्यतः ।
अभ्रस्थाः प्रपतन्त्यापो वायुना समुदीरिताः ।
संस्कारं कालजनितं मैत्रेयासाद्य निर्मलाः ॥ २,९.१० ॥
सरित्समुद्रभौमास्तु तथापः प्राणिसम्भवाः ।
चतुष्प्रकारा भगवानादत्ते सविता मुने ॥ २,९.११ ॥
आकाशगङ्गासलिलं तथादायगभस्तिमान् ।
अनभ्रगतमेवोर्व्यां सद्यः क्षिपति रश्मिभिः ॥ २,९.१२ ॥
तस्य संस्पर्शनिर्धूतपापपङ्को द्विजोत्तम ।
न याति नरकं मर्त्यो दिव्यं स्नानं हि तत्स्मृतम् ॥ २,९.१३ ॥
दृष्टसूर्यं हि यद्वारि पतत्यभ्रैर्विना दिवः ।
आकाशगङ्गासलिलं तद्गोभिः क्षिप्यते रवेः ॥ २,९.१४ ॥
कृत्तिकादिषु ऋक्षेषु विषमेषु च यद्दिवः ।
दृष्टार्कपतितं ज्ञेयं तद्गाङ्गं दिग्गजोज्झितम् ॥ २,९.१५ ॥
युग्मर्क्षेषु च यत्तोयं पतत्यर्कोज्झितं दिवः ।
तत्सूर्यरश्मिभिः सर्वं समादाय निरस्यते ॥ २,९.१६ ॥
उभयं पुण्यमत्यर्थं नृणां पापभयापहम् ।
आकाशगङ्गासलिलं दिव्यं स्नानं महामुने ॥ २,९.१७ ॥
यत्तु मैघैः समुत्सृष्टं वारि तत्प्राणिनां द्विज ।
पुष्णात्यौषधयः सर्वा जीवनायामृतं हि तत् ॥ २,९.१८ ॥
तेन वृद्धिं परां नीतः सकलश्चौषधीगणः ।
साधकः फलपाकन्तः प्रजानां द्विज जायते ॥ २,९.१९ ॥
तेन यज्ञान्यथाप्रोक्तान्मानवाः शास्त्रचक्षुषः ।
कुर्वन्त्यहरहस्तैश्च देवानाप्याययन्तिते ॥ २,९.२० ॥
एवं यज्ञाश्च वेदाश्च वर्णाश्च द्विजपूर्वकाः ।
सर्वे देवनिकायाश्च सर्वे भूतगणाश्च ये ॥ २,९.२१ ॥
वृष्ट्या धृतमिदं सर्वमन्नं निष्पाद्यते यया ।
सापि निष्पाद्यते वृष्टिः सवित्रा मुनिसत्तम ॥ २,९.२२ ॥
आधारभूतः सवितुर्ध्रुवो मुनिवरोत्तम ।
ध्रुवस्य शिशुपारोऽसौ सोऽपि नारायणात्मकः ॥ २,९.२३ ॥
हृदि नारायणस्तस्य शिशुमारस्यं संस्थितः ।
बिभर्ता सर्वभूतानामादिभूतः सनातनः ॥ २,९.२४ ॥
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेऽंशे नवमोऽध्यायः (९)

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. IX.

Planetary system, under the type of a Śiśumára or porpoise. The earth nourished by the sun. Of rain whilst the sun shines. Of rain from clouds. Rain the support, of vegetation, and thence of animal life. Náráyańa the support of all beings.

THE form of the mighty Hari which is present in heaven, consisting of the constellations, is that of a porpoise, with Dhruva situated in the tail. As Dhruva revolves, it causes the moon, sun, and stars to turn round also; and the lunar asterisms follow in its circular path; for all the celestial luminaries are in fact bound to the polar-star by aerial cords. The porpoise-like figure of the celestial sphere is upheld by Náráyańa, who himself, in planetary radiance, is seated in its heart; whilst the son of Uttanápáda, Dhruva, in consequence of his adoration of the lord of the world, shines in the tail of the stellar porpoise 1. The upholder of the porpoise-shaped sphere is the sovereign of all, Janárddana. This sphere is the supporter of Dhruva; and by Dhruva the sun is upstayed. Upon the sun depends this world, with its gods, demons, and men. In what manner the world depends upon the sun, be attentive, and you shall hear.

During eight months of the year the sun attracts the waters, which are the essence of all fluids, and then pours them upon earths (during the other four months) as rain 2: from rain grows corn; and by corn the whole world subsists. The sun with his scorching rays absorbs the moisture of the earth, and with them nourishes the moon. The moon communicates, through tubes of air, its dews to the clouds, which, being composed of smoke, fire, and wind (or vapour), can retain the waters with which they are charged: they are therefore called Abhras, because their contents are not dispersed 3. When however they are broken to

p. 231

pieces by the wind, then watery stores descend, bland, and freed front every impurity by the sweetening process of time. The sun, Maitreya, exhales watery fluids from four sources, seas, rivers, the earth, and living creatures. The water that the sun has drawn up from the Gangá of the skies he quickly pours down with his rays, and without a cloud; and men who are touched by this pure rain are cleansed from the soil of sin, and never see hell: this is termed celestial ablution. That rain which falls whilst the sun is shining, and without a cloud in the sky, is the water of the heavenly Ganges, shed by the solar rays. If, however, rain falls from a bright and cloudless sky whilst the sun is in the mansion of Krittiká and the other asterisms counted by odd numbers, as the third, fifth, &c., the water, although that of the Gangá of the sky, is scattered, by the elephants of the quarters, not by the rays of the sun: it is only when such rain falls, and the sun is in the even asterisms, that it is distributed by his beams 4.

The water which the clouds shed upon earth is in truth the ambrosia of living beings, for it gives fertility to the plants which are the support of their existence. By this all vegetables grow and are matured, and become the means of maintaining life. With them, again, those men

p. 232

who take the law for their light perform daily sacrifices, and through them give nourishment to the gods. And thus sacrifices, the Vedas, the font' castes, with the Brahmans at their head, all the residences of the gods, all the tribes of animals, the whole world, all are supported by the rains by which food is produced. But the rain is evolved by the sun; the sun is sustained by Dhruva; and Dhruva is supported by the celestial porpoise-shaped sphere, which is one with Náráyańa. Náráyańa, the primeval existent, and eternally enduring, seated in the heart of the stellar sphere, is the supporter of all beings.

Translator’s notes (4)
  1. A more particular description of this porpoise occurs farther on.

  2. Consequently, the Linga P. observes, there is no waste of water in the universe, as it is in constant circulation.

  3. The theory of the clouds is more fully detailed in the Váyu, Linga, and Matsya p. 231 Puráńas: it is the same in its general tenor, but comprises additional circumstances. Clouds, according to those authorities, are of three classes: 1. Ágneya, originating from fire or heat, or in other words evaporation: they are charged with wind and rain, and are of various orders, amongst which are those called Jímúta, from their supporting life; 2. Brahmaja, born from the breath of Brahmá: these are the clouds whence thunder and lightning proceed: and 3. Pakshaja, or clouds which were originally the wings of the mountains, and which were cut off by Indra: these are also termed Pushkáravarttakas, from their including water in their vortices: they are the largest and most formidable of all, and are those which, at the end of the Yugas and Kalpas, poor down the waters of the deluge. The shell of the egg of Brahmá, or of the universe, is formed of the primitive clouds.

  4. According to the Váyu, the water scattered by the elephants of the quarters is in summer dew, and in winter snow; or the latter is brought by the winds from a city called Puńd́ra, which lies between the Himavat and Hemakuta mountains, and falls down upon the former. In like manner, also, as heat radiates from the sun, so cold radiates from the moon.

II.10Book II, Chapter 10 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीपराशर उवाच
त्र्यशीतिमण्डलशतं काष्ठयोरन्तरं द्वयोः
आरोहणावरोहाभ्यां भानोरब्देन या गतिः १
स रथोधिष्ठितो देवैरादित्यै ऋषिभिस्तथा
गन्धर्वैरप्सरोभिश्च ग्रामणीसर्पराक्षसैः २
धाता क्रतुस्थला चैव पुलस्त्यो वासुकिस्तथा
रथभृद्ग्रामणीर्हेतिस्तुम्बुरुश्चैव सप्तमः ३
एते वसन्ति वै चैत्रे मधुमासे सदैव हि
मैत्रेय स्यन्दने भानोः सप्तमासाधिकारिणः ४
अर्यमा पुलहश्चैव रथौजाः पुञ्जिकस्थला
प्रहेतिः कच्छवीरश्व नारदश्च रथे रवेः ५
माधवे निवसन्त्येते शुचिसंज्ञे निबोध मे ६
मित्रोत्रिस्तक्षको रक्षः पौरुषेयोथ मेनका
हाहा रथस्वनश्चैव मैत्रेयैते वसन्ति वै ७
वरुणो वसिष्ठो रम्भा च सहजन्या हुहूरथः
रथचित्रस्तथा शुक्रे वसन्त्याषाढसंज्ञके ८
इन्द्रो विश्वासुः स्रोता एलापुत्रस्तथांगिराः
प्रम्लोचा च नभस्येते सप्तिश्चार्के वसन्ति वै ९
विवस्वानुग्रसेनश्च भृगुरापूरणस्तथा
अनुम्लोचा शंखपालो व्याघ्रो भाद्र पदे तथा १०
पूषा च सुरुचिर्वातो गौतमोथ धनञ्जयः
सुषेणोऽन्यो घृताची च वसन्त्याश्वयुजे रवौ ११
विश्वावसुर्भरद्वाजः पर्जन्यैरावतौ तथा
विश्वाची सेनजिच्चापि कार्त्तिके च वसन्ति वै १२
अंशः काश्यपतार्क्ष्यास्तु महापद्मस्तथोर्वशी
चित्रसेनस्तथा विद्युन्मार्गशीर्षेधिकारिणः १३
क्रतुर्भगस्तथोर्णायुः स्फूर्जः कार्कोटकस्तथा
अरिष्टनेमिश्चैवान्या पूर्वाचित्तिर्वराप्सराः १४
पौषमासे वसन्त्येते सप्तभास्करमण्डले
लोकप्रकाशनार्थाय विग्रवर्याधिकारिणः १५
त्वष्टाथ जमदग्निश्च कम्बलोथ तिलोत्तमा
ब्रह्मोपेतोथ ऋतजिद्धृतराष्ट्रोथ सप्तमः १६
माघमासे वसन्त्येते सप्त मैत्रेय भास्करे
श्रूयतां चापरे सूर्ये फाल्गुने निवसन्ति ये १७
विष्णुरश्वतरो रम्भा सूर्यवर्चाश्च सत्यजित्
विश्वामित्रस्तथा रक्षो यज्ञोपेतो महामुने १८
मासेष्वेतेषु मैत्रेय वसन्त्येते तु सप्तकाः
सवितुर्मण्डले ब्रह्मन्विष्णुशक्त्युपबृंहिताः १९
स्तुवन्ति मुनयः सूर्यं गंधर्वैर्गीयते पुरः
नृत्यन्त्यप्सरसो यान्ति सूर्यस्यानुनिशाचराः २०
वहन्ति पन्नगा यक्षैः क्रियतेऽभीषुसंग्रहः २१
वालखित्यास्तथैवैनं परिवार्य समासते २२
सोयं सप्तगणः सूर्यमण्डले मुनिसत्तम
हिमोष्णवारिवृष्टीनां हेतुः स्वसमयं गतः २३
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेंशो! दशमोऽध्यायः १०

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. X.

Names of the twelve Ádityas. Names of the Rishis, Gandharbhas, Apsarasas, Yakshas, Uragas, and Rákshasas, who attend the chariot of the sun in each month of the year. Their respective functions.

PARÁŚARA.--Between the extreme northern and southern points the sun has to traverse in a year one hundred and eighty degrees, ascending and descending 1. His car is presided over by divine Ádityas, Rishis, heavenly singers and nymphs, Yakshas, serpents, and Rákshasas (one of each being placed in it in every month). The Áditya Dhátri, the sage Pulastya, the Gandharba Tumburu, the nymph Kratust́halá, the Yaksha Rathakrit, the serpent Vásuki, and the Rákshas Heti, always reside in the sun's car, in the month of Madhu or Chaitra, as its seven guardians. In Vaiśákh or Mádhava the seven are Áryamat, Pulaha, Náreda, Punjikásthalí, Rathaujas, Kachaníra, and Praheti. In Śuchi or Jyesht́ha they are Mitra, Atri, Háhá, Mená, Rathaswana, Takshaka, and Paurusheya. In the month Śukra or Áshádha they are Varuńa, Vaśisht́ha, Huhu, Sahajanyá, Rathachitra, Nága, and Budha. In the month Nabhas (or Srávańa) they are Indra, Angiras, Viswávasu, Pramlochá, Śrotas, and Elapatra (the name of both serpent and Rákshas). In the month Bhádrapada they are Vivaswat, Bhrigu, Ugrasena, Anumlocha, Ápúrańa, Śankhapála, and Vyághra. In the month of Áswin they are Púshan, Gautama, Suruchi, Ghritáchí, Sushena, Dhananjaya, and Váta. In the month of Kártik they are Parjanya, Bharadwája, (another) Viswávasu, Viswáchí, Senajit, Airávata, and Chápa. In Agraháyana or Márgaśírsha they are Ansu, Kaśyapa, Chitrasena, Urvasi, Tárkshya, Mahápadma, and Vidyut. In the month of Pausha, Bhaga, Kratu, Urńáyu, Purvachittí,

p. 234

[paragraph continues] Arisht́anemi, Karkot́aka, and Sphúrja are the seven who abide in the orb of the sun, the glorious spirits who scatter light throughout the universe. In the month of Mágha the seven who are in the sun are Twasht́ri, Jamadagni, Dhritarasht́ra, Tilottamá, Ritajit, Kambala, and Brahmápeta. Those who abide in the sun in the month Phálguna are Vishńu, Visvamitra, Súryaverchchas, Rambhá, Satyajit, Aswatara, and Yajnápeta.

In this manner, Maitreya, a troop of seven celestial beings, supported by the energy of Vishńu, occupies during the several months the orb of the sun. The sage celebrates his praise, and the Gandharba sings, and the nymph dances before him: the Rákshas attends upon his steps, the serpent harnesses his steeds, and the Yaksha trims the reins: the numerous pigmy sages, the Bálakhilyas, ever surround his chariot. The whole troop of seven, attached to the sun's car, are the agents in the distribution of cold, heat, and rain, at their respective seasons 2.

Translator’s notes (2)
  1. It might be doubted whether the text meant 180 in each hemisphere or in both, but the sense is sufficiently clear in the Váyu, &c., and the number of Mańd́alas travelled in the year is 360: the Mańd́alas, 'circles' or 'degrees,' being in fact the sun's diurnal revolutions, and their numbers corresponding with the days of the solar year; as in the Bhavishya P. 'The horses of the sun travel twice 180 degrees in a year, internal and external (to the equator), in the order of the days.'

  2. A similar enumeration of the attendants upon the sun's car occurs in the Váyu, &c. For Yakshas, the generic term there employed is Grámańís, but the individuals are the same. The Kúrma and Bhavishya refer the twelve Ádityas to different months:--

    Vishńu.

    Kúrma.

    Bhavishya.

    Dhátri

    Chaitra

    Vaiśákha

    Kártika

    Áryamat

    Vaiśákha

    Chaitra

    Vaiśákha

    Mitra

    Jyesht́ha

    Márgaśírsha

    Márgaśírsha

    Varuńa

    Áshád́ha

    Mágha

    Bhádra

    Indra

    Śrávańa

    Jyesht́ha

    Áswina

    Vivaswat

    Bhádra

    Śrávańa

    Jyesht́ha

    Púshan

    Áswina

    Phálguna

    Pausha

    Parjanya

    Kártika

    Áswina

    Śrávańa

    Ansu

    Márgaśírsha

    Áshád́ha

    Áshád́ha

    Bhaga

    Pausha

    Bhádra

    Mágha

    Twasht́ri

    Mágha

    Kártika

    Phálguna

    Vishńu

    Phálguna

    Pausha

    Chaitra.

    Vishńu.

    Kúrma.

    Bhavishya.

    Dhátri

    Chaitra

    Vaiśákha

    Kártika

    Áryamat

    Vaiśákha

    Chaitra

    Vaiśákha

    Mitra

    Jyesht́ha

    Márgaśírsha

    Márgaśírsha

    Varuńa

    Áshád́ha

    Mágha

    Bhádra

    Indra

    Śrávańa

    Jyesht́ha

    Áswina

    Vivaswat

    Bhádra

    Śrávańa

    Jyesht́ha

    Púshan

    Áswina

    Phálguna

    Pausha

    Parjanya

    Kártika

    Áswina

    Śrávańa

    Ansu

    Márgaśírsha

    Áshád́ha

    Áshád́ha

    Bhaga

    Pausha

    Bhádra

    Mágha

    Twasht́ri

    Mágha

    Kártika

    Phálguna

    Vishńu

    Phálguna

    Pausha

    Chaitra.

II.11Book II, Chapter 11 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

यदेतद्भगवानाह गणः सप्तविधो रवेः
मण्डले हिमतापादेः कारणं तन्मया श्रुतम् १
व्यापारश्चापि कथितो गन्धर्वोरगरक्षसाम्
ऋषीणां वालखिल्यानां तथैवाप्सरसां गुरो २
यक्षाणां च रथे भानोर्विष्णुशक्तिधृतात्मनाम्
किं चादित्यस्य यत्कर्म तन्नात्रोक्तं त्वया मुने ३
यदि सप्तगणो वारि हिममुष्णं च वर्षति
तत्किमत्र रवेर्येन वृष्टिः सूर्यादितीर्यते
विवस्वानुदितो मध्ये यात्यस्तमिति किं जनः
ब्रवीत्येतत्समं कर्म यदि सप्तगणस्य तत् ५
पराशर उवाच
मैत्रेय श्रूयतामेतद्यद्भवान्परिपृच्छति
यथा सप्तगणोप्येकः प्राधान्येनाधिको रविः ६
सर्वशक्तिः परा विष्णो ऋग्यजुःसामसंज्ञिता
सैषा त्रयी तपत्यंहो जगतश्च हिनस्ति या ७
सैष विष्णुः स्थितः स्थित्यां जगतः पालनोद्यतः
ऋग्यजुः सामभूतोन्तः सवितुर्द्विजतिष्ठति ८
मासिमासि रविर्योयस्तत्र तत्र हि सा परा
त्रयीमयी विष्णुशक्तिरवस्थानं करोति वै ९
ऋचस्तुवन्ति पूर्वाह्णे मध्याह्नेथ यजूंषि वै
बृहद्रथन्तरादीनि सामान्यह्नःक्षये रविम् १०
अंगमेषा त्रयी विष्णो ऋग्यजुः सामसंज्ञिता
विष्णुशक्तिरवस्थानं सदादित्ये करोति सा ११
न केवलं रवेः शक्तिर्वैष्णवी सा त्रयीमयी
ब्रह्माथ पुरुषो रुद्रस्त्रयमेतत्त्रयीमयम् १२
सर्गादौ ऋङ्मयो ब्रह्मा स्थितौ विष्णुर्यजुर्मयः
रुद्रः साममयोन्ताय तस्मात्तस्याशुचिर्ध्वनिः १३
एवं सा सात्त्विकी शक्तिर्वैष्णवी या त्रयीमयी
आत्मसप्तगणस्थं तं भास्वंतमधितिष्ठति १४
तया चाधिष्ठितः सोपि जाज्वलीति स्वरश्मिभिः
तमः समस्तजगतां नाशं नयति चाखिलम् १५
स्तुवन्ति चैनं मुनयो गन्धर्वैर्गीयते पुरः
नृत्यन्त्योऽप्सरसो यान्ति तस्य चानु निशाचराः १६
वहन्ति पन्नगा यक्षैः क्रियतेऽभीषुसंग्रहः
वालखिल्यास्तथैवैनं परिवार्य समासते १७
नोदेता नास्तमेता च कदाचिच्छक्तिरूपधृक्
विष्णुर्विष्णोः पृथक् तस्य गणास्सप्तविधोऽप्ययम् १८
स्तम्भस्थदर्पणस्येव योऽयमासन्नतां गतः
छायादर्शनसंयोगं स तं प्राप्नोत्यथात्मनः १९
एवं सा वैष्णवी शक्तिर्नैवापैति ततो द्विज
मासानुमासं भास्वन्तमध्यास्ते तत्र संस्थितम् २०
पितृदेवमनुष्यादीन्स सदाप्याययन्प्रभुः
परिवर्तत्यहोरात्रकारणं सविता द्विज २१
सूर्यरश्मिसुषुम्णायस्तर्पितस्तेन चन्द्रमाः
कृष्णपक्षेमरैः शश्वत्पीयते वै सुधामयः २२
पीतं तं द्विकलं सोमं कृष्णपक्षक्षये द्विज
पिबन्ति पितरस्तेषां भास्करात्तर्पणं तथा २३
आदत्ते रश्मिभिर्यतु क्षितिसंस्थं रसं रविः
तमुत्सृजति भूतानां पुष्ट्यर्थं सस्यवृद्धये २४
तेन प्रीणात्यशेषाणि भूतानि भगवान्रविः
पितृदेवमनुष्यादीनेवमाप्याययत्यसौ २५
पक्षतृप्तिं तु देवानां पितॄणां चैव मासिकीम्
शश्वत्तृप्तिं च मर्त्यानां मैत्रेयार्कः प्रयच्छति २६
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेंश एकादशोऽध्यायः ११

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. XI.

The sun distinct from, and supreme over, the attendants on his car: identical with the three Vedas and with Vishńu: his functions.

MAITREYA.--You have related to me, holy preceptor, the seven classes of beings who are ever present in the solar orb, and are the causes of heat and cold: you have also described to me their individual functions, sustained by the energy of Vishńu: but you have not told me the duty of the sun himself; for if, as you say, the seven beings in his sphere are the causes of heat, cold, and rain, how can it be also true, as you have before mentioned, that rain proceeds from the sun? or how can it be asserted that the sun rises, reaches the meridian, or sets, if these situations be the act of the collective seven.

PARÁŚARA.--I will explain to you, Maitreya, the subject of your inquiry. The sun, though identified with the seven beings in his orb, is distinct from them as their chief. The entire and mighty energy of Vishńu, which is called the three Vedas, or Rich, Yajush, and Sáman, is that which enlightens the world, and destroys its iniquity. It is that also which, during the continuance of things, is present as Vishńu, actively engaged in the preservation of the universe, and abiding as the three Vedas within the sun. The solar luminary, that appears in every month, is nothing else than that very supreme energy of Vishńu which is composed of the three Vedas, influencing the motions of the planet; for the Richas (the hymns of the Rig-veda) shine in the morning, the prayers of the Yajush at noon, and the Vrihadrathantara and other portions of the Sáman in the afternoon. This triple impersonation of Vishńu, distinguished by the titles of the three Vedas, is the energy of Vishńu, which influences the positions of the sun 1.

p. 236

But this triple energy of Vishńu is not limited to the sun alone, for Brahmá, Purusha (Vishńu), and Rudra are also made up of the same triform essence. In creation it is Brahmá, consisting of the Rig-veda in preservation it is Vishńu, composed of the Yajur-veda; and in destruction Rudra, formed of the Sáma-veda, the utterance of which is consequently inauspicious 2.

Thus the energy of Vishńu, made up of the three Vedas, and derived from the property of goodness, presides in the sun, along with the seven beings belonging to it; and through the presence of this power the planet shines with intense radiance, dispersing with his beams the darkness that spreads over the whole world: and hence the Munis praise him, the quiristers and nymphs of heaven sing and dance before him, and fierce spirits and holy sages attend upon his path. Vishńu, in the form of his active energy, never either rises or sets, and is at once the. sevenfold sun and distinct from it. In the same manner as a man approaching a mirror, placed upon a stand, beholds in it his own image, so the energy (or reflection) of Vishńu is never disjoined (from the sun's car, which is the stand of the mirror), but remains month by month in the sun (as in the mirror), which is there stationed.

The sovereign sun, oh Brahman, the cause of day and night, perpetually revolves, affording delight to the gods, to the progenitors, and to mankind. Cherished by the Sushumna ray of the sun 3, the moon is fed to the full in the fortnight of its growth; and in the fortnight of its wane the ambrosia of its substance is perpetually drunk by the immortals, until the last day of the half month, when the two remaining digits are drunk by the progenitors: hence these two orders of beings are nourished

p. 237

by the sun. The moisture of the earth, which the sun attracts by his rays, he again parts with for the fertilization of the grain, and the nutriment of all terrestrial creatures; and consequently the sun is the source of subsistence to every class of living things, to gods, progenitors, mankind, and the rest. The sun, Maitreya, satisfies the wants of the gods for a fortnight (at a time); those of the progenitors once a month; and those of men and other animals daily.

Translator’s notes (3)
  1. This mysticism originates in part apparently from a misapprehension of metaphorical texts of the Vedas, such as 'that triple knowledge (the Vedas) shines;' and 'the hymns of the Rich shine;' and in part from the symbolization of the light of religious truth by the light of the p. 236 sun, as in the Gáyatri, p. 222. n. 13. To these are to be added the sectarial notions of the Vaishńavas.

  2. The formulæ of the Sáma-veda are not to be used along with those of the Rich and Yajush, at sacrifices in general.

  3. The Váyu, Linga, and Matsya P. specify several of the rays of the sun from amongst the many thousands which they say proceed from him. Of these, seven are principal, termed Sushumna, Harikeśa, Viśwakarman, Viśwakárya, Sampadvasu, Arvavasu, and Swaráj, supplying heat severally to the moon, the stars, and to Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.

II.12Book II, Chapter 12 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

रथस्त्रिचक्रः सोमस्य कुन्दाभास्तस्य वाजिनः ।
वामदक्षिणतो युक्ता दश तेन चरत्यसौ १ ।।
वीथ्याश्रयाणि ऋक्षाणि ध्रुवाधारेण वेगिना ।
ह्रासवृद्धिक्रमस्तस्य रश्मीनां सवितुर्यथा २ ।
अर्कस्येव हि तस्याश्वाः सकृद्युक्ता वहन्ति ते ।
कल्पमेकं मुनिश्रेष्ठ वारीगर्भसमुद्भवाः ३ ।
क्षीणं पीतं सुरैः सोममाप्याययति दीप्तिमान् ।
मैत्रेयैककलं सन्तं रश्मिनैकेन भास्करः ४ ।
क्रमेण येन पीतोऽसौ देवैस्तेन निशाकरम् ।
आप्याययत्यनुदिनं भास्करो वारितस्करः ५ ।
संभृतं चार्धमासेन तत्सोमस्थं सुधामृतम् ।
पिबन्ति देवा मैत्रेय सुधाहारा यतोऽमराः ६ ।
त्रयास्त्रिंशत्सहस्राणि त्रयस्त्रिंशच्छतानि च ।
त्रयस्त्रिंशत्तथा देवाः पिबन्ति क्षणदाकरम् ७ ।
कलाद्वयावशिष्टस्तु प्रविष्टः सूर्यमण्डलम् ।
अमाख्यारश्मौ वसति अमावास्या ततः स्मृता ८ ।
अप्सु तस्मिन्नहोरात्रे पूर्वं विशति चंद्रमाः ।
ततो वीरुत्सु वसति प्रयात्यर्कं ततः क्रमात् ९ ।
छिनत्ति वीरुधो यस्तु वीरुत्संस्थे निशाकरे ।
पत्रं वा पातयत्येकं ब्रह्महत्यां स विन्दति १० ।
सोमं पञ्चदशे भागे किंचिच्छिष्टे कलात्मके ।
अपराह्णे पितृगणा जघन्यं पर्युपासते ११ ।
पिबन्ति द्विकलाकारं शिष्टा तस्य कला तु या ।
सुधामृतमयी पुण्या तामिन्दोः पितरो मुने १२ ।
निस्सृतं तदमावास्यां गभस्तिभ्यः सुधामृतम् ।
मासं तृप्तिमवाप्याग्र्यां पितरः सन्ति निर्वृताः ।
सौम्या बर्हिषदश्चैव अग्निष्वात्ताश्च ते त्रिधा १३ ।
एवं देवान् सिते पक्षे कृष्णपक्षे तथा पितॄन् ।
वीरुधश्चामृतमयैः शीतैरप्परमाणुभिः १४ ।
वीरुधौषधिनिष्पत्त्या मनुष्यपशुकीटकान् ।
आप्याययति शीतांशुः प्राकाश्याह्लादनेन तु १५ ।
वाय्वग्निद्रव्यसंभूतो रथश्चन्द्र सुतस्य च ।
पिशंगैस्तुरगैर्युक्तः सोष्टाभिर्वायुवेगिभिः १६ ।
सवरूथः सानुकर्षो युक्तो भूसंभवैर्हयैः ।
सोपासंगपताकस्तु शुक्रस्यापि रथो महान् १७ ।
अष्टाश्वः काञ्चनः श्रीमान्भौमस्यापि रथो महान् ।
पद्मरागारुणैरश्वैः संयुक्तो वह्निसम्भवैः १८ ।
अष्टाभिः पांडुरैर्युक्तो वाजिभिः कांचनो रथः ।
तस्मिंस्तिष्ठति वर्षान्ते राशौराशौ बृहस्पतिः १९ ।
आकाशसम्भवैरश्वैः शबलैः स्यन्दनं युतम् ।
तमारुह्य शनैर्याति मन्दगामीशनैश्चरः २० ।
स्वर्भानोस्तुरगा ह्यष्टौ भृंगाभा धूसरं रथम् ।
सकृद्युक्तास्तु मैत्रेय वहन्त्यविरतं सदा २१ ।
आदित्यान्निस्सृतो राहुः सोमं गच्छति पर्वसु ।
आदित्यमेति सोमाच्च पुनः सौरेषु पर्वसु २२ ।
तथा केतुरथस्याश्वा अप्यष्टौ वातरंहसः ।
पलालधूमवर्णाभा लाक्षारसनिभारुणाः २३ ।
एते मया ग्रहाणां वै तवाख्याता रथा नव ।
सर्वे ध्रुवे महाभाग प्रबद्धा वायुरश्मिभिः २४ ।
ग्रहर्क्षताराधिष्ण्यानि ध्रुवे बद्धान्यश्षोतः ।
भ्रमन्त्युचितचारेण मैत्रेयानिलरश्मिभिः २५ ।
यावान्त्यश्चैव तारास्ता तावन्तो वातरश्मयः ।
सर्वे ध्रुवे निबद्धास्ते भ्रमन्तो भ्रामयन्ति तम् २६ ।
तैलपीडा यथा चक्रं भ्रमन्तो भ्रामयन्ति वै ।
तथा भ्रमन्ति ज्योतींषि वातविद्धानि सर्वशः २७ ।
अलातचक्रवद्यान्ति वातचक्रेरितानि तु ।
यस्माज्योतींषि वहति प्रवहस्तेन स स्मृतः २८ ।
शिशुमारस्तु यः प्रोक्तः स ध्रुवो यत्र तिष्ठति ।
सन्निवेशं च तस्यापि शृणुष्व मुनिसत्तम २९ ।
यदह्ना कुरुते पापं तं दृष्ट्वा निशि मुच्यते ।
यावन्त्यश्चैव तारास्ताः शिशुमाराश्रिता दिवि ।
तावन्त्येव तु वर्षाणि जीवत्यभ्यधिकानि च ३० ।
उत्तानपादस्तस्याधो विज्ञेयो ह्युत्तरो हनुः ।
यज्ञोऽधरश्च विज्ञेयो धर्मो मूर्द्धानमाश्रितः ३१ ।
हृदि नारायणश्चास्ते अश्विनौ पूर्वपादयोः ।
वरुणश्चार्यमा चैव पश्चिमे तस्य सक्थिनी ३२ ।
शिश्नः संवत्सरस्तस्य मित्रोऽपानं समाश्रितः ३३ ।
पुच्छेग्निश्च महेन्द्र श्च कश्यपोथ ततो ध्रुवः ।
तारका शिशुमारस्य नास्तमेति चतुष्टयम् ३४ ।
इत्येष सन्निवेशोऽयं पृथिव्या ज्योतिषां तथा ।
द्वीपानामुदधीनां च पर्वतानां च कीर्तितः ३५ ।
वर्षाणां च नदीनां च ये च तेषु वसन्ति वै ।
तेषां स्वरूपमाख्यातं संक्षेपः श्रूयतां पुनः ३६ ।
यदम्बु वैष्णवः कायस्ततो विप्र वसुन्धरा ।
पद्माकारा समुद्भूता पर्वताब्ध्यादिसंयुता ३७ ।
ज्योतींषि विष्णुर्भुवनानि विष्णुर्वनानि विष्णुर्गिरयो दिशश्च ।
नद्यः समुद्रा श्च स एव सर्वं यदस्ति यन्नास्ति च विप्रवर्य ३८ ।
ज्ञानस्वरूपो भगवान्यतोसावश्षोमूर्त्तिर्न तु वस्तुभूतः ।
ततो हि शैलाब्धिधरादिभेदाञ्जानीहि विज्ञानविजृम्भितानि ३९ ।
यदा तु शुद्धं निजरूपि सर्वं कर्मक्षये ज्ञानमपास्तदोषम् ।
तदा हि संकल्पतरोः फलानि भवन्ति नो वस्तुषु वस्तुभेदाः ४० ।
वस्त्वस्ति किं कुत्रचिदादिमध्यपर्यन्तहीनं सततैकरूपम् ।
यच्चान्यथात्वं द्विज याति भूयो न तत्तथा तत्र कुतो हि तत्त्वम् ४१ ।
मही घटत्वं घटतः कपालिका कपालिकाचूर्णरजस्ततोऽणुः ।
जनैः स्वकर्मस्तिमितात्मनिश्चयैरालक्ष्यते ब्रूहि किमत्र वस्तु ४२ ।
तस्मान्न विज्ञानमृतेस्ति किंचित्क्वचित्कदाचिद्द्विज वस्तुजातम् ।।
विज्ञानमेकं निजकर्मभेदविभिन्नचित्तेर्बहुधाभ्युपेतम् ४३।
ज्ञानं विशुद्धं विमलं विशो कमश्षोलोभादिनिरस्तसङ्गम् ।
एकं सदैकं परमः परेशः स वासुदेवो न यतोन्यदस्ति ४४ ।
सद्भाव एवं भवतो मयोक्तो ज्ञानं यथा सत्यमसत्यमन्यत् ।
एतत्तु यत्संव्यवहारभूतं तत्रापि चोक्तं भुवनाश्रितं ते ४५ ।
यज्ञः पशुर्वह्निरश्षोऋत्विक्सोमः सुराः स्वर्गमयश्च कामः ।
इत्यादिकर्माश्रितमार्गदृष्टं भूरादिभोगाश्च फलानि तेषाम् ४६ ।
यच्चैतद्भुवनगतं मया तवोक्तं सर्वत्र व्रजति हि तत्र कर्मवश्यः ।
ज्ञात्वैवं ध्रुवमचलं सदैकरूपं तत्कुर्याद्विशति हि येन वासुदेवम्४७ ।
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेंशो! द्वादशोऽध्यायः १२।
।

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. XII.

Description of the moon: his chariot, horses, and course: fed by the sun: drained periodically of ambrosia by the progenitors and gods. The chariots and horses of the planets: kept in their orbits by aerial chains attached to Dhruva. Typical members of the planetary porpoise. Vásudeva alone real.

PARÁŚARA.--The chariot of the moon has three wheels, and is drawn by ten horses, of the whiteness of the Jasmine, five on the right half (of the yoke), five on the left. It moves along the asterisms, divided into ranges, as before described; and, in like manner as the sun, is upheld by Dhruva; the cords that fasten it being tightened or relaxed in the same way, as it proceeds on its course. The horses of the moon, sprung from the bosom of the waters 1, drag the car for a whole Kalpa, as do the coursers of the sun. The radiant sun supplies the moon, when reduced by the draughts of the gods to a single Kalá, with a single ray; and in the same proportion as the ruler of the night was exhausted by the celestials, it is replenished by the sun, the plunderer of the waters: for the gods, Maitreya, drink the nectar and ambrosia accumulated in the moon during half the month, and from this being their food they are immortal. Thirty-six thousand three hundred and thirty-three divinities drink the lunar ambrosia. When two digits remain, the moon enters the orbit of the sun, and abides in the ray called Amá; whence the period is termed Amávásya. In that orbit the moon is immersed for a day and night in the water; thence it enters the branches and shoots of the trees; and thence goes to the sun. Consequently any one who cuts off a branch, or casts down a leaf, when the moon is in the trees (the day of its rising invisible), is guilty of Brahmanicide. When the remaining portion of the moon consists of but a fifteenth part, the progenitors approach it in the afternoon, and drink the last portion, that sacred Kali which is composed of ambrosia, and contained in the two digits of

p. 239

the form of the moon 2. Having drank the nectar effused by the lunar rays on the day of conjunction, the progenitors are satisfied, and remain tranquil for the ensuing month. These progenitors (or Pitris) are of three classes, termed Saumyas, Varhishadas, and Agnishwáttas 3. In this manner the moon, with its cooling rays, nourishes the gods in the light fortnight, the Pitris in the dark fortnight; vegetables, with the cool nectary aqueous atoms it sheds upon them; and through their developement it sustains men, animals, and insects; at the same time gratifying them by its radiance.

The chariot of the son of Chandra, Budha or Mercury, is composed of the elementary substances air and fire, and is drawn by eight bay horses of the speed of the wind. The vast car of Śukra (Venus) is drawn by earth-born horses 4, is equipped with a protecting fender and a floor, armed with arrows, and decorated by a banner. The splendid car of

p. 240

[paragraph continues] Bhauma (Mars) is of gold, of an octagonal shape, drawn by eight horses, of a ruby red, sprung from fire. Vrihaspati (Jupiter), in a golden car drawn by eight pale-coloured horses, travels from sign to sign in the period of a year: and the tardy-paced Śani (Saturn) moves slowly along in a car drawn by piebald steeds. Eight black horses draw the dusky chariot of Ráhu, and once harnessed are attached to it for ever. On the Parvas (the nodes, or lunar and solar eclipses), Ráhu directs his course from the sun to the moon, and back again from the moon to the sun 5. The eight horses of the chariot of Ketu are of the dusky red colour of Lac, or of the smoke of burning straw.

I have thus described to you, Maitreya, the chariots of the nine planets, all which are fastened to Dhruva by aerial cords. The orbs of all the planets, asterisms, and stars are attached to Dhruva, and travel accordingly in their proper orbits, being kept in their places by their respective bands of air. As many as are the stars, so many are the chains of air that secure them to Dhruva; and as they turn round, they cause the pole-star also to revolve. In the same manner as the oil-man himself, going round, causes the spindle to revolve, so the planets travel round, suspended by cords of air, which are circling round a (whirling) centre. The air, which is called Pravaha, is so termed because it bears along the planets, which turn round, like a disc of fire, driven by the aerial wheel 6.

The celestial porpoise, in which Dhruva is fixed, has been mentioned, but you shall hear its constituent parts in more detail, as it is of great efficacy; for the view of it at night expiates whatever sin has been committed during the day; and those who behold it live as many years as there are stars in it, in the sky, or even more. Uttánapáda is to be considered as its upper jaw; Sacrifice as its lower. Dharma is situated on its brow; Náráyańa in its heart. The Áswins are its two fore feet;

p. 241

and Varuńa and Áryamat its two hinder legs. Samvatsara is its sexual organ; Mitra its organ of excretion. Agni, Mahendra, Kaśyapa, and Dhruva, in succession, are placed in its tail; which four stars in this constellation never set 7.

I have now described to you the disposition of the earth and of the stars; of the insular zones, with their oceans and mountains, their Varshas or regions, and their inhabitants: their nature has also been explained, but it may be briefly recapitulated.

From the waters, which are the body of Vishńu, was produced the lotus-shaped earth, with its seas and mountains. The stars are Vishńu; the worlds are Vishńu; forests, mountains, regions, rivers, oceans are Vishńu: he is all that is, all that is not. He, the lord, is identical with knowledge, through which he is all forms, but is not a substance. You must conceive therefore mountains, oceans, and all the diversities of earth and the rest, are the illusions of the apprehension. When knowledge is pure, real, universal, independent of works, and exempt from defect, then the varieties of substance, which are the fruit of the tree of desire, cease to exist in matter. For what is substance? Where is the thing that is devoid of beginning, middle, and end, of one uniform

p. 242

nature? How can reality be predicated of that which is subject to change, and reassumes no more its original character? Earth is fabricated into a jar; the jar is divided into two halves; the halves are broken to pieces; the pieces become dust; the dust becomes atoms. Say, is this reality? though it be so understood by man, whose self-knowledge is impeded by his own acts. Hence, Brahman, except discriminative knowledge, there is nothing any where, or at any time, that is real. Such knowledge is but one, although it appear manifold, as diversified by the various consequences of our own acts. Knowledge perfect, pure, free from pain, and detaching the affections from all that causes affliction; knowledge single and eternal--is the supreme Vásudeva, besides whom there is nothing. The truth has been thus communicated to you by me; that knowledge which is truth; from which all that differs is false. That information, however, which is of a temporal and worldly nature has also been imparted to you; the sacrifice, the victim, the fire, the priests, the acid juice, the gods, the desire for heaven, the path pursued by acts of devotion and the rest, and the worlds that are their consequences, have been displayed to you. In that universe which I have described, he for ever migrates who is subject to the influence of works; but he who knows Vásudeva to be eternal, immutable, and of one unchanging, universal form, may continue to perform them 8, as thereby he enters into the deity.

Translator’s notes (8)
  1. So is the car, according to the Váyu. The orb of the moon, according to the Linga, is only congealed water; as that of the sun is concentrated heat.

  2. There is some indistinctness in this account, from a confusion between the division of the moon's surface into sixteen Kalás or phases, and its apportionment, as a receptacle of nectar, into fifteen Kalás or digits, corresponding to the fifteen lunations, on the fourteen of which, during the wane, the gods drink the amrita, and on the fifteenth of which the Pitris exhaust the remaining portion. The correspondence of the two distinctions appears to be intended by the text, which terms the remaining digit or Kalá, composed of Amrita, the form or superficies of the two Kalás. This, the commentator observes, is the fifteenth, not the sixteenth. The commentator on our text observes, also, that the passage is sometimes read ###, Lava meaning 'a moment,' 'a short period.' The Matsya and Váyu express the parallel passage so as to avoid all perplexity, by specifying the two Kalás as referring to time, and leaving the number of nectareous Kalás undefined: 'They, the Pitris, drink the remaining Kalás in two Kalás of time.' Col. Warren explains Kalá, or, as he 'writes it, Calá, in one of its acceptations, 'the phases of the moon, of which the Hindus count sixteen.' Kála Sankalita, 359. So the Bhágavata terms the moon, and the Váyu, after noticing the exhaustion of the fifteenth portion on the day of conjunction, states the recurrence of increase or wane to take place in the sixteenth phase at the beginning of each fortnight.

  3. The Váyu and Matsya add a fourth class, the Kavyas; identifying them with the cyclic years; the Saumyas and Agnishwáttas with the seasons; and the Varhishads with the months.

  4. The Váyu makes the horses ten in number, each of a different colour.

  5. The Matsya, Linga, and Váyu add the circumstance of Ráhu's taking up, on these occasions, the circular shadow of the earth.

  6. The different bands of air attached to Dhruva are, according to the commentator, varieties of the Pravaha wind; but the Kúrma and Linga enumerate seven principal winds which perform this function, of which the Pravaha is one.

  7. The four last are therefore stars in the circle of perpetual apparition. One of these is the pole-star; and in Kaśyapa we have a verbal affinity to Cassiopeia. The Śiśumára, or porpoise, is rather a singular symbol for the celestial sphere; but it is not more preposterous than many of the constellations of classical fiction. The component parts of it are much more fully detailed, in the Bhágavata, whence it has been translated by Sir Wm. Jones. As. Res. II. 402. The Bhágavata, however, mystifies the description, and says it is nothing more than the Dhárańá, or symbol, by which Vishńu, identified with the starry firmament, is to be impressed upon the mind in meditation. The account of the planetary system is, as usual, fullest in the Váyu, with which the Linga and Matsya nearly agree. The Bhavishya is nearly, also, the same. They all contain many passages common to them and to our text. In the Agni, Padma, Kúrma, Bráhma, Garud́a, and Vámana descriptions occur which enter into less detail than the Vishńu, and often use its words, or passages found in other Puráńas. Many intimations of a similar system occur in the Vedas, but whether the whole is to be found in those works is yet to be ascertained. It must not be considered as a correct representation of the philosophical astronomy of the Hindus, being mixed up with, and deformed by, mythological and symbolical fiction.

  8. Only, however, as far as they are intended to propitiate Vishńu, and not for any other purpose.

II.13Book II, Chapter 13 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीमैत्रेय उवाच ।
भगवन् ! सम्यगाख्यातं यत् पृष्टोऽसि मयाखलम् ।
भूसमुद्रादिसरितां संस्थानं ग्रहसंस्थितिम् ।। 1 ।।
विष्णवाधारं तथा चैतत् त्रैलोक्यं समवस्थितम् ।
परमार्थस्तु तेनोक्तो यथाज्ञानं प्रधानतः ।। 2 ।।
यत्त्वोतद्भगवानाह भरतस्य महीपतेः ।
कथयिष्यामि चरितं तन्माख्यातुमर्हसि ।। 3 ।।
भरतः स महीपालः शालग्रामेऽवसत् किल
योगयुक्तः समाधाय वासुदेवे सदा मनः ।। 4 ।।
पुण्यदेशप्रभावेण ध्यायतश्व सदा हरिम् ।
कथन्तु नाभवन्मुक्तिर्यदभूत् स द्रिजः पुनः ।। 5 ।।
विप्रत्वे च कृतं तेन यद्भूयःसुमहात्मना ।
भरतेन मुनिश्वेष्ठ! तत् सर्व्वं वक्तुमर्हसि ।। 6 ।।
पराशार अवाच ।
शालग्रामे महाभागो भगवन्नयस्तमानसः ।
स उवास चिरं कालं मैत्रेय! पृथिवीपतिः ।। 7 ।।
अहिंसादिष्वशेषेषु गुणेषु गुणिनां वरः ।
अवाप परमां काष्ठां मनसश्चापि संयमे ।। 8 ।।
यज्ञेशाच्युत गोविन्द माधवानन्त केशव !
कृष्णा विष्णो ह्टषीकेशेत्याह राजा स केवलम् ।। 9 ।।
नान्यज्जागाद मैत्रेय! किञ्चित् स्वप्नान्तरेऽपि च ।
एततूपरं तदर्थञ्च विना नान्यदचिन्तयत् ।। 10 ।।
समित्-पुष्प-कुशादानं चक्र देवक्रियाकृते ।
नान्यानि चक्र कर्म्माणि निः सङ्गो योगतापसः ।। 11 ।।
जगाम सोऽबिषेकार्थमेकदा तु महानदीम् ।
सस्नौ तत्र तदा चक्र स्नानस्यनन्तरक्रियाः ।। 12 ।।
अथातजगाम तत्तीर्थं जलं पात् पिपासिता ।
आसन्नप्रसवा ब्रह्मन्नेकैव हरिणी वनात् ।। 13 ।।
ततः समभवत्तत्र पीतप्राय जले तया ।
सिंहस्य नादः सुमहान् सर्व्वप्राणिभयङ्करः ।। 14 ।।
ततः सा सहसा त्रासादाप्लुता निम्नगातटम् ।
अत्युज्वारोहणेनास्या नद्यां गर्भः पपात सः ।। 15 ।।
तमुह्ममानं वेगेन वीचिमालापरिप्लुतम् ।
तजग्राह स नृपो गर्भात् पतितं मृगपोतकम् ।। 16 ।।
गर्भप्रव्युतिदोषेण प्रोत्तुङ्गाक्रमणोन च ।
मैत्रेय! सापि हरिणी पपात च ममार च ।। 17 ।।
हरिणीं तां विलोक्याथ विपन्नां नृपतापसः ।
मृगपोतं समादाय निजमाश्वममागतः ।। 18 ।।
चकारानुदिनञ्चासौ मृगपोतस्यवै नृपः ।
पोषण पुष्यमाणश्य स तेन वबृधे मुने ।। 19 ।।
चचाराश्रमपर्य्यन्तं तृणानि गहनेषु सः ।
दूरं गत्वा च शाद्दूलत्रासादभ्याययौ पुनः ।। 20 ।।
प्रातर्गत्वातिदूरञ्च सायमायाद यथाश्वमम् ।
पुनश्च भरतस्याभूदाश्वमस्योटजाजिरे ।। 21 ।।
तस्य तस्मिन्मृगे दूर-समीपपरिवर्त्तिनि ।
आसीच्चेतः समायुक्तं न ययावन्यतो द्रिज ।। 22 ।।
विमुक्तराज्यतनयः प्रोज्झिताशेषबान्धवः ।
ममत्वं स चकारोच्चैस्तस्मिन् हरिणबालके ।। 23 ।।
किं वृकैक्भक्षितो व्याघूः किं सिंहेन निपातितः ।
चिरायमाणे निष्कान्ते तस्यासीदिति मानसम् ।। 24 ।।
एषा वसुमती तस्य खुराग्रक्षतकर्बुरा ।
प्रीतये मम जातोऽसौ क्व ममैणकबालकः ।। 25 ।।
विषाणाग्रण मदूबाहुकण्डूयनपरो हि सः ।
क्षेमेणाभ्यागतोऽरण्यादिपि मां सुखयिष्यति ।। 26 ।।
एते लूनशिखास्तस्य दशनैरचिरोदूगतैः ।
कुशाः कासा विराजन्ते वटवः सामगा इव ।। 27 ।।
इत्थं चिरगते तस्मिन् स चक्र मानसं मुनिः ।
प्रीतिप्रसन्नवदनः पार्श्वस्थे चाभवन्मृगे ।। 28 ।।
समाधिभङ्गस्तासीत् तन्ममत्वादृतात्मनः ।
सन्त्यक्तराज्यभोगर्द्धिखजनस्यापि भूपतेः ।। 29 ।।
चपलं चपले तस्मिन् दूरगं दूरगामिनि ।
मृगपतोऽभवज्वित्तं स्थैर्य्यवत्तस्य भूपतेः ।। 30 ।।
कालेन गच्छता सोऽथ कालञ्चक्र महीपतिः ।
पितेव सास्त्रं पुत्रेण मृगपोतेन वीक्षितः ।। 31 ।।
मृगमेव तदाद्राक्षीत् त्यजन् प्राणानसावपि ।
तन्मयत्वेन मैत्रय! नान्यत् किञ्चिदचिन्तयत् ।। 32 ।।
ततश्व तत्कालकृतां भावनां प्राप्य तादृशीम् ।
जम्बूमार्गे महारण्ये जातो जातिस्मरो मृगः ।। 33 ।।
जातिस्मरत्वादुद्रिग्नः संसारस्य द्रिजोत्तम!
विहाय मातरं भूयः शालग्राममुपाययौ ।। 34 ।।
शुष्कैस्तृणैस्तथा पर्णौः स कुर्व्वन्नात्मपोषणम् ।
मृगत्वहतुभूतस्य कर्म्मणो निष्कृतिं ययौ ।। 35 ।।
तत्र चोतसृष्टदेहोऽसौ जज्ञ जातिस्मरो द्रिजः ।
सदाचारवतां शुद्ध योगिनां प्रवरे कुले ।। 36 ।।
अर्व्वविज्ञानसम्पन्नः सर्व्वशास्त्रार्थतत्त्ववित् ।
अपश्यत् स च मैत्रेय ! आत्मानं प्रकृतेः परम् ।। 37 ।।
आत्मनोऽधिगतज्ञानो देवादीनि महामुने ।
सर्व्वभूतान्यभेदेन स ददर्श महामतिः ।। 38 ।।
न पपाठ गुरुप्रोक्तं कृतोपनयनः श्वुतिम् ।
न ददर्श च कर्माणि शास्त्रणि जगृहे न च ।। 39 ।।
उक्तोऽपि बहुशः किञ्चिड़वाक्यमभाषत ।
तदप्यसंस्कारगुणां ग्राम्यवाक्योक्तिसंश्रितम् ।। 40 ।।
अपध्वस्तवपुः सोऽपि मलिनाम्बरधृग् द्रिजः ।
क्लिन्नदन्तान्तरः सर्वैः परिभूतः स नागरैः ।। 41 ।।
सम्मानना परां हानिं योगर्द्धेः कुरुते यतः ।
जनेनावमतो योगी योगसिद्धिञ्च विन्दति ।। 42 ।।
तस्माज्वरेत वै योगी सतां मार्गमदूषयन् ।
जना यथावमन्येरन् गच्छयुर्नैव सङ्गतिम् ।। 43 ।।
हिरण्यगर्भवचनं विचिन्त्येत्थं महामतिः ।
आत्मानं दर्शयामास जडोन्मत्ताकृतिं जने ।। 44 ।।
भुहूक्ते कुलम्षव्रीह्मादिशाकं वन्यं फलं कणान् ।
यदू यदाप्रोति सुबहु तदत्ते कालसंयमम् ।। 45 ।।
पितर्युपरते सोऽथ भ्रातृ-भ्रातृव्य-बान्धवैः ।
कारितः क्षेत्रकर्मादि कदन्नाहारपोषितः ।। 46 ।।
स तूक्षपीनावयवो जद़कारी च कर्मणि ।
सर्वलोकोपकरणां बभूवाहारवेतनः ।। 47 ।।
[तं तादृशमसंस्कारं विप्राकृविचेष्टितम् ।
क्षत्ता पृषतराजस्य काल्यै पशुमकल्पयत् ।। 48 ।।
रात्रौ तं समलङकृत्य वैशसस्य विधानतः ।
अधिष्ठितं महाकाली ज्ञात्वा योगेश्वरं तथा ।। 49 ।।
ततः खड गं समादाय निशितं निशि सा तथा ।
क्षत्तार क्रूरकर्माणमच्छिनत् कण्ठमूलतः ।
स्वपार्षदयुता देवी पपौ रुधिरमुल्वणम् ।। 50 ।।
ततः सौवीरराजस्य प्रयातस्य महात्मनः ।
विष्टिकर्ताथ मन्येत विष्टियोग्योऽयमित्यपि ।। 51 ।।
तं तादृशं महात्मानं भस्मच्छन्नमिवानलम् ।]*
*[ एतदाकारबन्धनीदूयान्तर्गतबागः सर्वत्र पुस्तके न दृश्यते । श्रीधरेणाप्यस्य व्याख्या न कृता, अतः सर्वसम्मति शून्यत्वादयं बागो बन्धनीदूयगर्मै स्थापितः ।]
तं तादृशमसंस्कारं विप्राकृतिविचेष्टितम् ।
क्षत्ता सौवीरराजस्य विष्टियोग्यममन्यत ।। 52 ।।
स राजा शिविकारूढो गन्तूं कृतमतिर्द्रिज !
बभूवेक्षुमतीतीरे कपिलर्षेर्वराश्रमम् ।। 53 ।।
श्रेयः किमत्र संसारे दुः खप्राये नृणामिति ।
प्रष्टुं तं मोक्षधर्मज्ञ कपिलाख्यं महामुनिम् ।। 54 ।।
उवाह शिविकां तस्य क्षत्तुर्वचनचोदितः ।
नृणां विष्टिगृहीतानामन्येषां सोऽपि मध्यगः ।। 55 ।।
गृहीतो विष्टिना विप्रः सर्वज्ञानैकभाजनम् ।
जातिस्मणेऽसौ पापस्य क्षयकाम उवाह ताम् ।। 56 ।।
ययौ जड़गतिः सोऽथ युगमात्रवलोकनः ।
कुर्वन् मतिमतां श्रेष्ठस्तदन्ये त्वरितं ययुः ।। 57 ।।
विलोक्य नृपतिः सोऽथ विषमां शिबिकागतिम् ।
किमेतदित्याह समं गम्यतां शिबिकावहाः ।। 58 ।।
पुनस्तथैव शिबिकां विलोक्य विषमां हि सः ।
नृपः किमेतदित्याह भवद भिर्गम्यतेऽन्यथा ।। 59 ।।
भूपतेर्वदतस्तस्य श्रुत्वेत्थं बहुशो वचः ।
शिबिकावाहकाः प्रोचुरयं यातीत्यसत्वरम् ।। 60 ।।
किं श्रान्तोऽस्यल्पमद्वानं त्वयोढा शिहिका मम ।
किमायाससहो न त्वं पीनानसि निरीक्ष्यसे ।। 61 ।।
नाहं पीवान्न चैवोढा शिबिका भवतो मया ।
न श्रान्तोऽस्मि न चायासः सोञव्योऽस्ति महीपते ।। 62 ।।
प्रत्यक्षं दृश्यसे पीवानद्यांपि शिबिका त्वयि ।
श्रमश्व भारोदूहने भवत्येव हि देहिनाम् ।। 63 ।।
प्रत्यक्ष भवता भूप ! यदू दृष्ट मम तदूद ।
बलवानबलश्चेति वाच्यं पश्वादू विशेषणम् ।। 64 ।।
त्वयोढ़ा शिबिका चेति त्वय्यद्यापि च संस्थिता ।
मिथ्यैतदत्र तु भवाञ्छृणोतु वचनं मम ।। 65 ।।
भूमौ पादयुगस्यास्था जह्घ पाददूये स्थिते ।
ऊरू जङ्घादूयावस्थौ तदाधारं तथोदरम् ।। 66 ।।
वक्षः स्थलं तथा बाहू स्कन्धौ चोदरसंस्थितौ ।
स्कन्धाश्रितेयं शिबिका मम भारोऽत्र किकृतः ।। 67 ।।
शिबिकायां स्थितं चेदं वपुस्त्वदुपलक्षितम् ।
तत्र त्वमहमप्यत्र प्रोच्यते चेदमन्यथा ।। 68 ।।
अहं त्वञ्च तथान्ये च भूतैरुह्माम पार्थिव ।
गुणप्रवाहपतितो भूतवर्गोऽपि यात्ययम् ।। 69 ।।
कर्मवश्या गुणाश्चैते सत्त्वाद्या- पृथिवीपते !
अविद्यासञ्चितं कर्म्म तज्वाशेषेषु जन्तुषु ।। 70 ।।
आत्मा शुद्धोऽक्षरः शान्तो निर्गुणः प्रकृतेः परः ।
प्रवृद्धयपचयौ नास्य एकस्याखिलजन्तुषु ।। 71 ।।
यदा नोपचयस्तस्य न चैवापचये नृप!
तदा पीवानसीतीत्थं कया युत्तया त्वयेरितम् ।। 72 ।।
भू-पाद-जङ्घा-क्ठ्यूरु-जठरादिषु संस्थिते ।
शिबिकेयं यता स्कन्धे तथा भारः समस्त्वया ।। 73 ।।
तदान्यैर्जन्तुभर्भूप ! शिबिकोढा न केवलम् ।
लै-द्रुम-गृहोत्थोऽपि पृथिवीसम्भवोऽपि वा ।। 74 ।।
यदा पुसः पृथग्भावः प्राकृतैः कारणौर्नृप !
सोढव्यस्तु तदायासः कथं वा नृपते । मया ।। 75 ।।
यदूद्रव्या शिबिका चेयं तदूद्रव्यो भूतसंग्रहः ।
भवतो मेऽखिलस्यास्य ममत्वेनोपबृ हितः ।। 76 ।।
एवमुक्त्वाभवन्मैनी स वहञ्छिबिकां द्रिज !
सोऽपि राजावतीर्य्योर्व्यं तत्पादौ जगृहे त्वरन् ।। 77 ।।
भो भो विसृज्य शिबिकां प्रसादं कुरु मे द्रिज!
कथ्यतां को भवानत्र जालमरूपधरः स्थितः ।। 78 ।।
यो भवान् यन्निमित्तं वा यदागमनकारण्म् ।
तत्सर्वं कथ्यतां विदून् ! मह्म शुश्रूषवे त्वया ।। 79 ।।
श्रूयतां कोऽहमित्येतदूक्तुं भूप! न शक्यते ।
उपभोगनिमित्तञ्च सर्वत्र गमनक्रिया ।। 80 ।।
सुखदुः खोपभोगौ तु तौ देहाद्यु पपादकौ ।
धर्माधर्मोद्भवौ भोक्तु जन्तुर्देहादिमृच्छति ।। 81 ।।
सर्वस्यैव हि बूपाल ! जन्तोः सर्वत्र कारणम् ।
धर्माधर्मौ यतः कस्मात् कारणां पृच्छयते त्वया ।। 82 ।।
धर्माधमां न सन्देहः सर्वकार्य्येषु कारणम् ।
उपभोगनिमित्तञ्च देहाद्द हान्तरागमः ।। 83 ।।
यत्त्वैतद भवता प्रोक्त कोऽहमित्येतदात्मनः ।
वक्तु न शक्यते श्रोतु तन्ममेच्छा प्रवर्त्तते ।।84 ।।
योऽस्ति सोऽहमिति ब्रह्मन्! कथं वक्तुं न शक्यते ।
आत्मन्येष न दोषाय शब्दोऽहमिति यो द्रिज ।। 85 ।।
शब्दोऽहमिति दोषाय आत्मन्येष तथैव तत् ।
अनात्मन्यात्मविज्ञानं शब्दो वा भ्रान्तिलक्षणाः ।। 86 ।।
जिह्वा ब्रवीत्यहमिति दन्तोष्ठौ तालुक नृप!
एते नाहं यतः सर्वे वाङूनिष्पादनहेतवः ।। 87 ।।
किंहेतुभिर्वदत्येषा वागेवाहमिति स्वयम् ।
तथापि वाग् नाहमेतद् वक्तु मित्थं न युज्यते ।। 88 ।।
पिण्डः पृथग् यतः पुसः शिरः पाण्यादिलक्षणाः ।
ततोऽहमिति कुत्रैतां संज्ञां राजन्! करोम्यहम् ।। 89 ।।
यद्यन्योऽस्ति परः कोऽपि मत्तः पार्थिवसत्तम !
तदैषोऽहमयञ्चान्यो वक्तुमेवमपीष्यते ।। 90 ।।
यदा समस्तदेहेषु पुमानेको व्यवस्थितः ।
तदा हि को भवान् कोऽहमित्येतद् विफलं वचः ।। 91 ।।
त्वं राजा शिबिका चेयमिमे वाहाः पुरः सराः ।
अयञ्च भवतो लोको न सदेतन्नृपोच्यते ।। 92 ।।
वृक्षदू दारु ततश्चैयं शिबिका त्वदधिष्ठिता ।
किं वृक्षसंज्ञा वास्याः स्याद्दारुसंज्ञाथवा नृप ।। 93 ।।
वृक्षारूढो महाराजो नायं वदति ते जनः ।
न च दारुणि सर्वस्त्वां ब्रवीति शिबिकागतम् ।। 94 ।।
शिबिका दारुसङ्गातो रचनास्थितिसंस्थितः ।
आन्वष्यतां नृपश्वेष्ठ! तद्भदे शिबिका त्वया ।। 95 ।।
एवं छत्रशलाकानां पृथगूभागो विमृश्यताम् ।
क्व यातं छत्रमित्येष न्यायस्त्वयि तथा मयि ।। 96 ।।
पुमान् स्त्री गौरजो वाजी कुञ्जरो विहगस्तरुः ।
देहेषु लोकसंज्ञयं विज्ञया कर्म्महेतुषु ।। 97 ।।
पुमान्न देवो न नरो न पशुर्न च पादपः ।
शरीराकृतिबेदास्तु भूपैते कर्म्मयोनयः ।। 98 ।।
वस्तु राजेति यल्लोके यच्च राजभटात्मकम् ।
तथान्यज्व नृपेत्थं तन्न सत्सङ्कल्पनामयम् ।। 99 ।।
यत्तु कालान्तरेणापि नान्यां संज्ञामुपैति वै ।
परिणामादिसम्भूतां तदूस्तु नृप! तज्व किम् ।। 100 ।।
त्वं राजा सर्व्वलोकस्य पितुः पुत्रो रिपो रिपुः ।
पत्न्याः पतिः पिता सूनोः किं त्वा भूप ! वदाम्यहम् ।। 101 ।।
त्वं किमेतच्छिरः किं नु ग्रीवा तव तथोदरम् ।
किमु पादादिकं त्वं वा तवैतत् किं महीपते ।। 102 ।।
समस्तावयवेभ्यस्त्वं पृथग् भूप ! व्यवस्थितः ।
कोऽहमित्यत्र निपुणो भूत्वा चिन्तय पार्थिव ।। 103 ।।
एवं व्यवस्थिते तत्त्वे मयाहमिति भाषितुम् ।
पथक् करणनिष्पाद्य शक्यते नपते! कथम् ।। 104 ।।

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. XIII.

Legend of Bharata. Bharata abdicates his throne, and becomes an ascetic: cherishes a fawn, and becomes so much attached to it as to neglect his devotions: he dies: his successive births: works in the fields, and is pressed as a palankin-bearer for the Rájá of Sauvíra: rebuked for his awkwardness: his reply: dialogue between him and the king.

MAITREYA.--Reverend sir 1, all that I asked of you has been thoroughly explained; namely, the situation of the earth, oceans, mountains, rivers, and planetary bodies; the system of the three worlds, of which Vishńu is the stay. The great end of life has also been expounded by you, and the preeminence of holy knowledge. It now remains that you fulfil the promise you made some time since 2, of relating to me the story of king Bharata, and how it happened that a monarch like him, residing constantly at the sacred place Śálagráma, and engaged in devotion, with his mind ever applied to Vásudeva, should have failed, through time sanctity of the shrine, and the efficacy of his abstractions, to obtain final emancipation; how it was that he was born again as a Brahman; and what was done by the magnanimous Bharata in that capacity: all this it is fit that you inform me.

PARÁŚARA.--The illustrious monarch of the earth resided, Maitreya, for a considerable period at Śálagráma, his thoughts being wholly dedicated to god, and his conduct distinguished by kindness and every virtue, until he had effected, in the highest degree, the entire control over his mind. The Rájá was ever repeating the names, Yajneśa, Achyuta, Govinda, Mádhava, Ananta, Keśava, Krishńa, Vishńu, Hrishikeśa; nothing else did be utter, even in his dreams; nor upon anything but those names, and their import, did he ever meditate. He accepted fuel, flowers, and holy grass, for the worship of the deity, but

p. 244

performed no other religious rites, being engrossed by disinterested, abstract devotion.

On one occasion he went to the Mahanadi 3, for the purpose of ablution: he bathed there, and performed the ceremonies usual after bathing, Whilst thus occupied, there came to the same place a doe big with young, who had come out of the forest to drink of the stream. Whilst quenching her thirst, there was heard on a sudden the loud and fearful roaring of a lion; on which the doe, being excessively alarmed, jumped out of the water upon the bank. In consequence of this great leap, her fawn was suddenly brought forth, and fell into the river; and the king, seeing it carried away by the current, caught hold of the young animal, and saved it from being drowned. The injury received by the deer, by her violent exertion, proved fatal, and she lay down, and died; which being observed by the royal ascetic, he took the fawn in his arms, and returned with it to his hermitage: there he fed it and tended it every day, and it throve and grew up under his care. It frolicked about the cell, and grazed upon the grass in its vicinity; and whenever it strayed to a distance, and was alarmed at a wild beast, it ran back thither for safety. Every morning it sallied forth from home, and every evening returned to the thatched shelter of the leafy bower of Bharata.

Whilst the deer was thus the inmate of his hermitage, the mind of the king was ever anxious about the animal, now wandering away, and now returning to his side, and he was unable to think of anything else. He had relinquished his kingdom, his children, all his friends, and now indulged in selfish affection for a fawn. When absent for a longer time than ordinary, he would fancy that it had been carried off by wolves, devoured by a tiger, or slain by a lion. "The earth," he would exclaim, "is embrowned by the impressions of its hoofs. What has become of the young deer, that was born for my delight? How happy I should be

p. 245

if he had returned from the thicket, and I felt his budding antlers rubbing against my arm. These tufts of sacred grass, of which the heads have been nibbled by his new teeth, look like pious lads chanting the Sáma-veda 4." Thus the Muni meditated whenever the deer was long absent from him; and contemplated him with a countenance animated with pleasure as he stood by his side. His abstraction was interrupted, the spirit of the king being engrossed by the fawn, even though he had abandoned family, wealth, and dominion. The firmness of the prince's mind became unsteady, and wandered with the wanderings of the young deer. In the course of time the king became subject to its influence. He died, watched by the deer, with tears in its eyes, like a son mourning for his father; and he himself, as he expired, cast his eyes upon the animal, and thought of nothing else, being wholly occupied with one idea.

In consequence of this predominant feeling at such a season, he was born again, in the Jambumárga forests, as a deer 5, with the faculty of recollecting his former life; which recollection inspiring a distaste for the world, he left his mother, and again repaired to the holy place Śálagráma. Subsisting there upon dry grass and leaves, he atoned for the acts which had led to his being born in such a condition; and upon his death he was next born as a Brahman, still retaining the memory of his prior existence. He was born in a pious and eminent family of ascetics, who were rigid observers of devotional rites. Possessed of all true wisdom, and acquainted with the essence of all sacred writings, he beheld soul as contradistinguished from matter (Prakriti). Embued with knowledge of self, he beheld the gods and all other beings as in reality the same. It did not happen to him to undergo investiture with the Brahmanical thread, nor to read the Vedas with a spiritual preceptor, nor to perform ceremonies, nor to study the scriptures. Whenever spoken to, he replied incoherently and in ungrammatical and unpolished

p. 246

speech. His person was unclean, and he was clad in dirty garments. Saliva dribbled from his mouth, and he was treated with contempt by all the people. Regard for the consideration of the world is fatal to the success of devotion. The ascetic who is despised of men attains the end of his abstractions. Let therefore a holy man pursue the path of the righteous, without murmuring; and though men contemn him, avoid association with mankind. This, the counsel of Hirańyagarbha 6, did the Brahman call to mind, and hence assumed the appearance of a crazy ideot in the eyes of the world. His food was raw pulse, potherbs, wild fruit, and grains of corn. Whatever came in his way he ate, as part of a necessary, but temporary infliction 7. Upon his father's death he was set to work in the fields by his brothers and his nephews, and fed by them with vile food; and as he was firm and stout of make, and a simpleton in outward act, he was the slave of every one that chose to employ him, receiving sustenance alone for his hire.

The head servant of the king of Sauvíra, looking upon him as an indolent, untaught Brahman, thought him a fit person to work without pay (and took him into his master's service to assist in carrying the palankin.)

The king having ascended his litter, on one occasion, was proceeding to the hermitage of Kapila, on the banks of the Ikshumatí river 8, to consult the sage, to whom the virtues leading to liberation were known, what was most desirable in a world abounding with care and sorrow. Amongst those who by order of his head servant had been compelled gratuitously to carry the litter was the Brahman, who had been equally pressed into this duty, and who, endowed with the only universal knowledge, and remembering his former existence, bore the burden as the means of expiating the faults for which he was desirous to atone. Fixing his eyes upon the pole, he went tardily along, whilst the other

p. 247

bearers moved with alacrity; and the king, feeling the litter carried unevenly, called out, "Ho bearers! what is this? Keep equal pace together." Still it proceeded unsteadily, and the Rájá again exclaimed, "What is this? how irregularly are you going!" When this had repeatedly occurred, the palankin-bearers at last replied to the king, "It is this man, who lags in his pace." "How is this?" said the prince to the Brahman, "are you weary? You have carried your burden but a little way; are you unable to bear fatigue? and yet you look robust." The Brahman answered and said, "It is not I who am robust, nor is it by me that your palankin is carried. I am not wearied, prince, nor am I incapable of fatigue." The king replied, "I clearly see that you are stout, and that the palankin is borne by you; and the carriage of a burden is wearisome to all persons." "First tell me," said the Brahman, "what it is of me that you have clearly seen 9, and then you may distinguish my properties as strong or weak. The assertion that you behold the palankin borne by me, or placed on me, is untrue. Listen, prince, to what I have to remark. The place of both the feet is the ground; the legs are supported by the feet; the thighs rest upon the legs; and the belly reposes on the thighs; the chest is supported by the belly; and the arms and shoulders are propped up by the chest: the palankin is borne upon the shoulders, and how can it be considered as my burden? This body which is seated in the palankin is defined as Thou; thence what is elsewhere called This, is here distinguished as I and Thou. I and thou and others are constructed of the elements; and the elements, following the stream of qualities, assume a bodily shape; but qualities, such as goodness and the rest, are dependant upon acts; and acts, accumulated in ignorance, influence the condition of all beings 10. The pure, imperishable soul, tranquil, void of qualities, preeminent over nature (Prakriti), is one, without increase or diminution, in all bodies. But if it be equally exempt from increase or diminution, then with what propriety

p. 248

can you say to me, 'I see that thou art robust?' If the palankin rests on the shoulders, and they on the body; the body on the feet, and the feet on the earth; then is the burden borne as much by you as by me 11. When the nature of men is different, either in its essence or its cause, then may it be said that fatigue is to be undergone by me. That which is the substance of the palankin is the substance of you and me and all others, being an aggregate of elements, aggregated by individuality."

Having thus spoken, the Brahman was silent, and went on bearing the palankin; but the king leaped out of it, and hastened to prostrate himself at his feet; saying, "Have compassion on me, Brahman, and cast aside the palankin; and tell me who thou art, thus disguised under the appearance of a fool." The Brahman answered and said, "Hear me, Rája,. Who I am it is not possible to say: arrival at any place is for the sake of fruition; and enjoyment of pleasure, or endurance of pain, is the cause of the production of the body. A living being assumes a corporeal form to reap the results of virtue or vice. The universal cause of all living creatures is virtue or vice: why therefore inquire the cause (of my being the person I appear)." The king said, "Undoubtedly virtue and vice are the causes of all existent effects, and migration into several bodies is for the purpose of receiving their consequences; but with respect to what you have asserted, that it is not possible for you to tell me who you are, that is a matter which I am desirous to hear explained. How can it be impossible, Brahman, for any one to declare himself to be that which he is? There can be no detriment to one's-self from applying to it the word I." The Brahman said, "It is true that there is no wrong done to that which is one's-self by the application to it of the word I; but the term is characteristic of error, of conceiving that to be the self (or soul) which is not self or soul. The tongue articulates the word I, aided by the lips, the teeth, and the palate; and these are the origin of the expression, as they are the causes of the production of speech. If by these instruments speech is able to utter the word I, it is nevertheless

p. 249

improper to assert that speech itself is I 12. The body of a man, characterized by hands, feet, and the like, is made up of various parts; to which of these can I properly apply the denomination I? If another being is different specifically from me, most excellent monarch, then it may be said that this is I; that is the other: but when one only soul is dispersed in all bodies, it is then idle to say, Who are you? who am I? Thou art a king; this is a palankin; these are the bearers; these the running footmen; this is thy retinue: yet it is untrue that all these are said to be thine. The palankin on which thou sittest is made of timber derived from a tree. What then? is it denominated either timber or a tree? People do not say that the king is perched upon a tree, nor that he is seated upon a piece of wood, when you have mounted your palankin. The vehicle is an assemblage of pieces of timber, artificially joined together: judge, prince, for yourself in what the palankin differs really from the wood. Again; contemplate the sticks of the umbrella, in their separate state. Where then is the umbrella? Apply this reasoning to thee and to me 13. A man, a woman, a cow, a goat, a horse, an elephant, a bird, a tree, are names assigned to various bodies, which are the consequences of acts. Man 14 is neither a god, nor a man, nor a brute, nor a tree; these are mere varieties of shape, the effects of acts. The thing which in the world is called a king, the servant of a king, or by any other appellation, is not a reality; it is the creature of our imaginations: for what is there in the world, that is subject to vicissitude, that does not in the course of time go by different names. Thou art called the monarch of the world; the son of thy father; the enemy

p. 250

of thy foes; the husband of thy wife; the father of thy children. What shall I denominate thee? How art thou situated? Art thou the head or the belly? or are they thine? Art thou the feet? or do they belong to thee? Thou art, oh king, distinct in thy nature from all thy members! Now then, rightly understanding the question, think who I am; and how it is possible for me, after the truth is ascertained (of the identity of all), to recognise any distinction, or to speak of my own individuality by the expression I.'

Translator’s notes (14)
  1. One copy addresses Paráśara, Bhagavan sarvabhutesa, 'Sacred sovereign, lord of all creatures;' rather an unusual title for a sage, even though an inspired one. The other two copies begin, Samyagákhyátam, 'All has been thoroughly explained.'

  2. See page 264.

  3. The Mahánadí is properly a river in Orissa, but the name is applicable to any great stream, and its connexion with Śálagráma Tírtha makes it probable that it is intended for the Gandaki or Gandaka, in which the Śálagram or Ammonite is most abundantly found. It may be here noticed that Śálagráma is named amongst the Tírthas in the Mahábhárata: see p. 163.

  4. The applicability of this simile is not explained by the commentator: it refers possibly to the cropped or shaven heads of the religious students.

  5. According to the Bhágavata, Jambumárga is the Kálanjara mountain or Kalanjar in Bundelkhand.

  6. Hirańyagarbha or Brahmá is named here instead of the Yoga doctrine, which is sometimes ascribed to him as its author.

  7. As a Kála sanyama, a state of suffering or mortification lasting only for a season; or, in other words, bodily existence; the body being contemplated as a sore, for which food is the unguent; drink, the lotion; and dress, the bandage.

  8. A river in the north of India.

  9. That is, What have you discerned of me, my body, life, or soul?

  10. The condition--that is, the personal individuality--of any one is the consequence of his acts; but the same living principle animates him which is common to all living things.

  11. The body is not the individual; therefore it is not the individual, but the body, or eventually the earth, which bears the burden.

  12. That is, speech, or any or all of the faculties or senses, is not soul.

  13. The aggregate limbs and senses no more constitute the individual, than the accidental combination of certain pieces of wood makes the fabric anything else than wood: in like manner as the machine is still timber, so the body is still mere elementary matter. Again; the senses and limbs, considered separately, no more constitute the man, than each individual stick constitutes the umbrella. Whether separate or conjoined, therefore, the parts of the body are mere matter; and as matter does not make up man, they do not constitute an individual.

  14. T́he term in this and the preceding clause is Pumán; here used generically, there specifically.

II.14Book II, Chapter 14 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

श्रीपराशर उवाच
निशम्य तस्येति वचः परमार्थसमन्वितम् ।
प्रश्रयावनतो भूत्वा तमाह नृपतिर्द्विजम् ॥ २,१४.१ ॥
राजोवाच
भगवन्यत्त्वया प्रोक्तं परमार्थमयं वचः ।
श्रुते तस्मिन्भ्रमन्तीव मनसो मम वृत्तयः ॥ २,१४.२ ॥
एतद्विवेकविज्ञानं यदशेषेषु जन्तुषु ।
भवता दर्शितं विप्र तत्परं प्रकृतेर्महत् ॥ २,१४.३ ॥
नाहं वहामि शिबिकां शिबिका न मयि स्थिता ।
शरीरमन्यदस्मत्तो येनेयं शिबिका धृता ॥ २,१४.४ ॥
गुणप्रवृत्त्या भूतानां प्रवृत्तिः कर्मचोदिता ।
प्रवर्तन्ते गुणा ह्येते किं ममेति त्वयोदितम् ॥ २,१४.५ ॥
एतस्मिन्परमार्थज्ञ मम श्रोत्रपथं गते ।
मनो विह्वलतामेति परमार्थार्थितां गतम् ॥ २,१४.६ ॥
पूर्वमेव महाभागं कपिलर्षिमहं द्विज ।
प्रष्टुमभ्युद्यतो गत्वा श्रेयः किं त्वत्र शंस मे ॥ २,१४.७ ॥
तदन्तरे च भवता यदेतद्वाक्यमीरितम् ।
तेनैव परमार्थार्थं त्वयि चेतः प्रधावति ॥ २,१४.८ ॥
कपिलर्षिर्भगवतः सर्वभूतस्य वै द्विज ।
विष्णोरंशो जगन्मोहनाशायोर्वीमुपागतः ॥ २,१४.९ ॥
स एव भगवान्नूनमस्माकं हितकाम्यया ।
प्रत्यक्षतामत्र गतो यथैतद्भावतोच्यते ॥ २,१४.१० ॥
तन्मह्यं प्रणताय त्वं यच्छ्रेयः परमं द्विजः ।
तद्वदाखिल विज्ञानजलवीच्युदधिर्भवान् ॥ २,१४.११ ॥
ब्राह्मण उवाच
भूप पृच्छसि किं श्रेयः परमार्थं नु पृच्छसि ।
श्रेयांस्यपरमार्थानि अशेषाणि च भूपते ॥ २,१४.१२ ॥
देवताराधनं कृत्वा धनसम्पदमिच्छति ।
पुत्रानिच्छति राज्यं च श्रेयस्तस्यैव तन्नृप ॥ २,१४.१३ ॥
कर्म यज्ञात्मकं श्रेयः फलं तत्प्राप्तिलक्षणम् ।
श्रेयः प्रधानं च फले तदेवानभिसंहिते ॥ २,१४.१४ ॥
आत्मा ध्येयः सदा भूप योगयुक्तैस्तथा परम् ।
श्रेयस्तस्यैव संयोगः श्रेयो यः परमात्मनः ॥ २,१४.१५ ॥
श्रेयांस्येवमनेकानि शतशोय सहस्रसः ।
सन्त्यत्र परमार्थस्तु न त्वेते श्रूयतां च मे ॥ २,१४.१६ ॥
धर्माय त्यज्यते किन्तु परमार्थो धनं यदि ।
व्ययश्च क्रियते कस्मात्कामप्राप्त्युपलक्षणः ॥ २,१४.१७ ॥
पुत्रश्चेत्परमार्थः स्यात्सोऽप्यन्यस्य नरेश्वर ।
परमार्थभूतः सोन्यस्य परमार्थो हि तत्पिता ॥ २,१४.१८ ॥
एवं न परमार्थोस्ति जगत्यस्मिञ्चराचरे ।
परमार्थो हि कार्याणि कारणानामशेषतः ॥ २,१४.१९ ॥
राज्यादिप्राप्तिरत्रोक्ता परमार्थतया यदि ।
परमार्था भवन्त्यत्र न भवन्ति च वै ततः ॥ २,१४.२० ॥
ऋग्यजुःसामनिष्पाद्यं यज्ञकर्म मतं तव ।
परमार्थभूतं तत्रापि श्रूयतां गदतो मम ॥ २,१४.२१ ॥
यत्तु निष्पाद्यते कार्यं मृदा कारणभूतया ।
तत्कारणानुगमनाज्ज्ञायते नृप मृण्मयम् ॥ २,१४.२२ ॥
एवं विनाशिभिर्द्रव्यैः समिदाज्यकुशादिभिः ।
निष्पाद्यते क्रिया या तु सा भवित्री विनाशिनी ॥ २,१४.२३ ॥
अनाशो परमार्थश्च प्राज्ञौरभ्युपगम्यते ।
तत्तु नाशि न सन्देहो नाशिद्रव्योपपादितम् ॥ २,१४.२४ ॥
तदेवाफलदं कर्म परमार्थो मतस्तव ।
मुक्तिसाधनभूतत्वात्परमार्थो न साधनम् ॥ २,१४.२५ ॥
ध्यानं चैवात्मनो भूपु परमार्थार्थशब्दितम् ।
भेदकारि परेभ्यस्तु परमार्थो न भेदवान् ॥ २,१४.२६ ॥
परमात्मात्मनोर्योगः परमार्थ इतीष्यते ।
मिथ्यैतदन्यद्रव्यं हि नैति तद्द्रव्यतां यतः ॥ २,१४.२७ ॥
तस्माच्छ्रेयांस्यशेषाणि नृवैतानि न संशयः ।
परमार्थस्तु भूपाल संक्षेपाच्छ्रूयतां मम ॥ २,१४.२८ ॥
एको व्यापी समः शुद्धो निर्गुणः प्रकृतेः परः ।
जन्मवृद्ध्यादिरहित आत्मा सर्वगतोव्ययः ॥ २,१४.२९ ॥
परज्ञानमयो सद्भिर्नामजात्यादिभिर्विभुः ।
न योगवान्न युक्तोभून्नैव पार्थिव योक्ष्यते ॥ २,१४.३० ॥
तस्यात्मपरदेहेषु सतोप्येकमयं हि यत् ।
विज्ञानं परमार्थोऽसौ द्वैतिनोऽतथ्यर्शिनः ॥ २,१४.३१ ॥
वेणुरन्ध्रप्रभेदेन भेदः षङ्जादिसंज्ञितः ।
अभेदव्यापिनोवायोस्तथास्य परमात्मनः ॥ २,१४.३२ ॥
एकस्वरूपभेदश्च ब्राह्मकर्मावृतिप्रजः ।
देवादिभेदेऽपध्वस्ते नास्त्येवावरणे हि सः ॥ २,१४.३३ ॥
इति श्रीविष्णुमहापुराणे द्वितीयेऽंशे चतुर्दशोऽध्यायः (१४)

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. XIV.

Dialogue continued. Bharata expounds the nature of existence, the end of life, and the identification of individual with universal spirit.

PARÁŚARA.--Having heard these remarks, full of profound truth, the king was highly pleased with the Brahman, and respectfully thus addressed him: "What you have said is no doubt the truth; but in listening to it my mind is much disturbed. You have shewn that to be discriminative wisdom which exists in all creatures, and which is the great principle that is distinct from plastic nature; but the assertions--'I do not bear the palankin---the palankin does not rest upon me--the body, by which the vehicle is conveyed, is different from me--the conditions of elementary beings are influenced by acts, through the influence of the qualities, and the qualities are the principles of action;'--what sort of positions are these. Upon these doctrines entering into my ears, my mind, which is anxious to investigate the truth, is lost in perplexity. It was my purpose, illustrious sage, to have gone to Kapila Rishi, to inquire of him what in this life was the most desirable object: but now that I have heard from you such words, my mind turns to you, to become acquainted with the great end of life. The Rishi Kapila is a portion of the mighty and universal Vishńu, who has come down upon earth to dissipate delusion; and surely it is he who, in kindness to me, has thus manifested himself to me in all that you have said. To me, thus suppliant, then, explain what is the best of all things; for thou art an ocean overflowing with the waters of divine wisdom." The Brahman replied to the king, "You, again, ask me what is the best of all things, not what is the great end of life 1; but there are many things which are

p. 252

considered best, as well as those which are the great ends (or truths) of life. To him who, by the worship of the gods, seeks for wealth, prosperity, children, or dominion, each of these is respectively best. Best is the rite or sacrifice, that is rewarded with heavenly pleasures. Best is that which yields the best recompense, although it be not solicited. Self-contemplation, ever practised by devout ascetics, is to them the best. But best of all is the identification of soul with the supreme spirit. Hundreds and thousands of conditions may be called the best; but these are not the great and true ends of life. Hear what those are. Wealth cannot be the true end of life, for it may be relinquished through virtue, and its characteristic property is expenditure for the gratification of desire. If a son were final truth, that would be equally applicable to a different source; for the son that is to one the great end of life, becomes the father of another. Final or supreme truth, therefore, would not exist in this world, as in all these cases those objects which are so denominated are the effects of causes, and consequently are not finite. If the acquisition of sovereignty were designated by the character of being the great end of all, then finite ends would sometimes be, and sometimes cease to be. If you suppose that the objects to be effected by sacrificial rites, performed according to the rules of the Rik, Yajur, and Sama Vedas, be the great end of life, attend to what I have to say. Any effect which is produced through the causality of earth partakes of the character of its origin, and consists itself of clay; so any act performed by perishable agents, such as fuel, clarified butter, and Kuśa grass, must itself be of but temporary efficacy. The great end of life (or truth) is considered by the wise to be eternal; but it would be transient, if it were accomplished through transitory things. If you imagine that this great truth is the performance of religious acts, from which no recompense is sought, it is not so; for such acts are the means of obtaining liberation, and truth is (the end), not the means. Meditation on self, again, is said to be for the sake of supreme truth; but the object of this is to establish distinctions (between soul and body), and the great truth of all is without distinctions. Union of self with supreme spirit is said to be the great end of all; but this is false; for one substance cannot become substantially

p. 253

another 2. Objects, then, which are considered most desirable are infinite. What the great end of all is, you shall, monarch, briefly learn from me. It is soul: one (in all bodies), pervading, uniform, perfect, preeminent over nature (Prakriti), exempt from birth, growth, and decay, omnipresent, undecaying, made up of true knowledge, independent, and unconnected with unrealities, with name, species, and the rest, in time present, past, or to come. The knowledge that this spirit, which is essentially one, is in one's own and in all other bodies, is the great end, or true wisdom, of one who knows the unity and the true principles of things. As one diffusive air, passing through the perforations of a flute, is distinguished as the notes of the scale (Sherga and the rest), so the nature of the great spirit is single, though its forms be manifold, arising from the consequences of acts. When the difference of the investing form, as that of god or the rest, is destroyed, then there is no distinction."

Translator’s notes (2)
  1. You ask what is Śreyas, not what is Paramártha: the first means literally 'best,' 'most excellent,' and is here used to denote temporary and special objects, or sources of happiness, as wealth, posterity, power, &c.; the latter is the one great object or end of life, true wisdom or truth, knowledge of the real and universal nature of soul.

  2. But this is to be understood as applying to the doctrines which distinguish between the vital spirit (Jívátmá) and the supreme spirit (Paramátmá), the doctrine of the Yoga. It is here argued, that it is absurd to talk of effecting a union between the soul of man and supreme soul; for if they are distinct essentially, they cannot combine; if they are already one and the same, it is nonsense to talk of accomplishing their union. The great end of life or truth is not to effect the union of two things, or two parts of one thing, but to know that all is unity.

II.15Book II, Chapter 15 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

पराशर उवाच ।
इत्युक्ते मौनिनं भूयश्विन्तयानं महीपतिम् ।
प्रत्युवाचाथ विप्रोऽसावदू तौन्तर्गतां कथाम् ।। 1 ।।
श्रूयतां नृपशाद्दूल! यदूगोतमृबुणा पुरा ।
अवबोधं जनयता निदाघस्य महात्मनः ।। 2 ।।
ऋभुर्नामाभवत् पुत्रो ब्रह्मणः परमेष्ठिनः ।
विज्ञाततत्त्वसद्रावो निसर्गादेव भूपते ।। 3 ।।
तस्य शिष्यो निदाघोऽबूत् पुलस्त्यतनयः पुरा ।
प्रादादशेषविज्ञानं स तस्मै परया मुदा ।। 4 ।।
अवाप्यज्ञानत्त्वस्य न तस्यादूतैवासनाम ।
स ऋभुस्तर्कयामास निदाघस्य नरेश्वर ।। 5 ।।
देविकायास्तटे वीरनगरं नाम वै पुरम् ।
समृद्धमतिरम्यं च पुलस्त्येन निवेशितम् ।। 6 ।।
रम्योपवनपर्य्यन्ते स तस्मिन् पार्थिवोत्तम !
निदाघो नाम योगज्ञ ऋभुशिष्योऽवसत् पुरा ।। 7 ।।
दिव्येवर्षसहस्त्रे तु समतीतेऽस्य तत्पुरम् ।
जगाम स ऋभुः शिष्यं निदाघमवलोककः ।। 8 ।।
स तस्य वैश्वदेवान्ते द्रारालोकनगोचरे ।
स्थितस्तेन गृहीतार्घ्यो निजवेश्म प्रवेशितः ।। 9 ।।
पर्क्षालिताङ घ्रिपाणिं च कृतासनपरिग्रहम् ।
उवाच स द्रिजश्वेष्ठो भूज्यतामिति सादरम् ।। 10 ।।
ऋभुरुवाच ।
भो विप्रवर्य्य! भोक्तव्यं यदन्नं भवतो गृहे ।
तत् कथ्यतां कदन्नेषु न प्रीतिः सतत मम ।। 11 ।।
निदाघ उवाच ।
भक्त-यावक-वाठ्यानामपूपानाञ्च मे गृहे ।
यदू रोचते द्रिजश्रेष्ठ!तत् त्वं भुङ श्र्व यथेच्छया ।। 12 ।।
ऋभुरुवाच ।
कदन्नानि द्रिजैतानि मृष्टमन्नं प्रयच्छ मे ।
संयाव-पायसादीनि द्रप्स्यफाणितावन्ति च ।। 13 ।।
निदाघ उवाच ।
हे हे शालिनि मदगेहे यत किञ्चिदतिशोभनम् ।
भक्ष्योपसाधनं मष्टं तेनास्यान्नां प्रसाधय ।। 14 ।।
ब्राह्मण उवाच ।
इत्युक्ता तेन सा पत्री मृष्टमन्नं द्रिजस्य यत् ।
प्रसाधितवती तदू वै भर्त्तुर्वचनगौरवात् ।। 15 ।।
तं भुक्तवन्तमिच्छातो मृष्टमन्नं महामुनिम् ।
निदाघः प्राह भूपाल! प्रश्रयावनतः स्थितः ।। 16 ।।
निदाघ उवाच ।
अपि ते परमा तृप्तिरुत्पन्ना तुष्टिरेव च ।
अपि ते मानसं खस्थमाहारेण कृतं द्रिज ।। 17 ।।
क्क निवासो भवान् विप्र ! क्क च गन्तु समुद्यतः ।
आगम्यते च भवता यतस्तज्व द्रिजोच्यताम् ।। 18 ।।
ऋबुरुवाच ।
क्षुदू यस्य तस्य भुक्तेऽन्ने तृप्तिर्ब्राह्मण! जायते ।
न मे क्षु न्नाभवत् तृप्तिः कस्मान्मां परिपृच्छसि ।। 19 ।।
वह्निना पार्थिवे धातौ क्षयिते क्षु त्सनुद्भवः ।
भवत्यम्भांस च क्षीणो नृणां तृड़पि जायते ।। 20 ।।
क्षुत्तृषौ देहधर्म्माख्ये न ममैते यतो द्रिज ।
ततः क्षु त्सम्भवाभावात् तृप्तिरस्त्येव मे सदा ।। 21 ।।
मनसः स्वस्थता तुष्टिश्वित्तधर्म्माविमौ द्रिज ।
चेतसो यस्य तत् पृच्छ पुमानेबिर्न युज्यते ।। 22 ।।
क्व निवासस्तवेत्युक्तं क्व गन्तासि स यत् त्वया ।
कु तश्वागम्यते तत्र त्रितयेऽपि निबोध मे ।। 23 ।।
पुमान् सर्व्वगतो व्यापा आकाशवदयं यतः ।
कुतः कुत्र क्व गन्तासीत्येतदप्यर्थवत् कथम् ।। 24 ।।
नाहं गन्ता न चागन्ता नैकदेशनिकेतनः ।
त्वं चान्येच न च त्वं त्वं नान्ये नैवाहमप्यहम् ।। 25 ।।
मष्टं न मष्टमप्येषा जिज्ञासा मे कृता तव ।
किं वक्ष्यसीति तत्रापि श्रूयतां द्रिजसत्तम ।। 26 ।।
किमस्वादूथवा मृष्टं भुञ्जतोऽन्नं द्रिजोत्तम ।
मृष्टमेव यदामृष्टं तदैवोदू गकारकम् ।। 27 ।।
अमृष्टं जायते मृष्टं मृष्टादुद्रिजते जनः ।
आदिमध्यावसानेषु किमन्नं रुचिकारकम् ।। 28 ।।
मृन्मयं हि गृहं यदून्मृदा लिप्त स्थिरं भवेत् ।
पार्थिवोऽयं तथा देहः पार्थिवैः परमाणभिः ।। 29 ।.
यव-गोधूम-मुदूगादि घृतं तैलं पयो दधि ।
गुड फलादीनि तथा पार्थिवाः परमाणवः ।। 30 ।।
तदेतदू भवता ज्ञात्वा मृष्टामृष्टविचारि यत् ।
तन्मनः समातालम्बि कार्य्यं साम्यं हि मुक्तय ।। 31 ।।
इतायाकर्ण्य वच्स्तस्य परमार्थाश्रितं नृफ!
प्रणिपत्य महाभागे निदाघो वाक्यमब्रवीत् ।। 32 ।।
प्रसीद मद्धितार्थाय कथ्यतां यस्त्वमागतः ।
नष्टो मोहस्तवाकर्ण्य वचांस्येतानि मे द्रिज ।। 33 ।।
ऋभुरस्मि तवाचार्य्यः प्रज्ञादानाय ते द्रिज!
इहागतोऽहं यास्यामि परमार्थस्तवोदितः ।। 34 ।।
एवमेकमिदं विद्धि न भेदि सकलं जगत् ।
वासुदेवाभिधेयस्य स्वरूपं परमात्मनः ।। 35 ।।
तथेत्युक्त्वा निदाघेन प्रणिपातपुरः सरम् ।
पूजितः परया भतया इच्छातः प्रययावृभुः ।। 36 ।।

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. XV.

Bharata relates the story of Ribhu and Nidágha. The latter, the pupil of the former, becomes a prince, and is visited by his preceptor, who explains to him the principles of unity, and departs.

PARÁŚARA continued.--Having terminated these remarks, the Brahman repeated to the silent and meditating prince a tale illustrative of the doctrines of unity. "Listen, prince," he proceeded, "to what was formerly uttered by Ribhu, imparting holy knowledge to the Brahman Nidágha. Ribhu was a son of the supreme Brahmá, who, from his innate disposition, was of a holy character, and acquainted with true wisdom. Nidágha, the son of Pulastya, was his disciple; and to him Ribhu communicated willingly perfect knowledge, not doubting of his being fully confirmed in the doctrines of unity, when he had been thus instructed.

"The residence of Pulastya was at Víranagara, a large handsome city on the banks of the Devíká river. In a beautiful grove adjoining to the stream the pupil of Ribhu, Nidágha, conversant with devotional practices, abode. When a thousand divine years had elapsed, Ribhu went to the city of Pulastya, to visit his disciple. Standing at the doorway, at the end of a sacrifice to the Viśwadevas, he was seen by his scholar, who hastened to present him the usual offering, or Arghya, and conducted him into the house; and when his hands and feet were washed, and he was seated, Nidágha invited him respectfully to eat (when the following dialogue ensued):--

"Ribhu. 'Tell me, illustrious Brahman, what food there is in your house; for I am not fond of indifferent viands.'

"Nidágha. 'There are cakes of meal, rice, barley, and pulse in the house; partake, venerable sir, of whichever best pleases you.'

"Ribhu. 'None of these do I like; give me rice boiled with sugar, wheaten cakes, and milk with curds and molasses.'

"Nidágha. 'Ho dame, be quick, and prepare whatever is most delicate and sweet in the house, to feed our guest.'

p. 255

"Having thus spoken, the wife of Nidágha, in obedience to her husband's commands, prepared sweet and savoury food, and set it before the Brahman; and Nidágha, having stood before him until he had eaten of the meal which he had desired, thus reverentially addressed him:--

"Nidágha. 'Have you eaten sufficiently, and with pleasure, great Brahman? and has your mind received contentment from your food? Where is your present residence? whither do you purpose going? and whence, holy sir, have you now come?'

"Ribhu. 'A hungry man, Brahman, must needs be satisfied when he has finished his meal. Why should you inquire if my hunger has been appeased? When the earthy element is parched by fire, then hunger is engendered; and thirst is produced when the moisture of the body has been absorbed (by internal or digestive heat). Hunger and thirst are the functions of the body, and satisfaction must always be afforded me by that by which they are removed; for when hunger is no longer sensible, pleasure and contentment of mind are faculties of the intellect: ask their condition of the mind then, for man is not affected by them. For your three other questions, Where I dwell? Whither I go? and Whence I come? hear this reply. Man (the soul of man) goes every where, and penetrates every where, like the ether; and is it rational to inquire where it is? or whence or whither thou goest? I neither am going nor coming, nor is my dwelling in any one place; nor art thou, thou; nor are others, others; nor am I, I. If you wonder what reply I should make to your inquiry why I made any distinction between sweetened and unsweetened food, you shall hear my explanation. What is there that is really sweet or not sweet to one eating a meal? That which is sweet, is no longer so when it occasions the sense of repletion; and that which is not sweet, becomes sweet when a man (being very hungry) fancies that it is so. What food is there that first, middle, and last is equally grateful. As a house built of clay is strengthened by fresh plaster, so is this earthly body supported by earthly particles; and barley, wheat, pulse, butter, oil, milk, curds, treacle, fruits, and the like, are composed of atoms of earth. This therefore is to be understood by you, that the mind which properly judges of what is or is not sweet

p. 256

is impressed with the notion of identity, and that this effect of identity tends to liberation.'

"Having heard these words, conveying the substance of ultimate truth, Nidágha fell at the feet of his visitor, and said, 'Shew favour unto me, illustrious Brahman, and tell me who it is that for my good has come hither, and by whose words the infatuation of my mind is dissipated.' To this, Ribhu answered, 'I am Ribhu, your preceptor, come hither to communicate to you true wisdom; and having declared to you what that is, I shall depart. Know this whole universe to be the one undivided nature of the supreme spirit, entitled Vásudeva.' Thus having spoken, and receiving the prostrate homage of Nidágha, rendered with fervent faith, Ribhu went his way."

II.16Book II, Chapter 16 · Sanskrit source · English source

Sanskrit

ऋबुर्वर्षसहस्त्र तु समतीते नरेश्वर!
निदाघज्ञानदानाय तदेव नगरं ययौ ।। 1 ।।
नगरस्य वहिः सोऽथ निदाघं ददृशे मुनिः ।
महाबलपरीवारे पुरं विशति पार्थिवे ।। 2 ।।
दूरे स्थितं महाभागं जंनसम्मर्द्द वर्ज्जकम् ।
क्षु त्क्षामकण्ठमायान्तमराण्यात् ससमितुकुशम् ।। 3 ।।
दृष्वा निदाघं स ऋभुरुपगम्याभिवाद्य च ।
उवाच कस्मादेकान्ते स्थीयते भवता द्रिज ।। 4 ।।
बो विप्र ! जनसम्मर्द्दो महानेष महनिष जनिश्वरे ।
प्रविविक्षौ पुरं रम्यं तेनात्र स्थीयते मया ।। 5 ।।
नराधिपोऽत्र कतमः कतमश्चेतरो जनः ।
कथ्यतां मे द्रिजश्वेष्ठ! त्वमभिज्ञो मतो मम ।। 6 ।।
योऽयं गजेन्द्रमुन्मत्तमद्रिश्वृङ्गसमुच्छिर्तम् ।
अधिरूढो नरेन्द्रोऽयं परलोकस्तथेतरः ।। 7 ।।
एतौ हि गज-राजानौ युगपदू दशितौ मम ।
बवता न विशेषेण पृथकूचिह्नपिलक्षणौ ।। 8 ।।
तत् कथ्यतां महाभाग ! विशेषो भवतानयोः ।
ज्ञातु मिच्छाम्यहं कोऽत्र गजः को वा नराधिपः ।। 9 ।।
गजो योऽयमधो ब्रह्मन् ! उपर्य्यस्यैष भूपतिः ।।
वाह्म-वाहकसाबन्धं को न जानाति वै द्रिज ।। 10 ।।
जानाम्यहं यथा ब्रह्म स्तथा मामवबोधम ।
अवःशह्दनिगद्य किं किञ्चोद्ध्व मभिधीयते ।। 11 ।।
इत्युक्तः सहसारुह्म निदाघः प्राह त ऋबुम् ।
श्रूयतां कथयाम्येष यन्मां त्वं परिपृच्छसि ।। 12 ।।
उपर्य्यहं यथा राजा त्वमधः कूञ्जरो यथा ।
अवबोधाय ते ब्रह्मन् ! दृष्टान्तो दसितो मया ।। 13 ।।
त्वं राजेव द्रिजश्वेष्ठ! स्थितोऽहं गजवद् यदि ।
तदेतत् त्वं समाचक्ष्व कतमस्त्वमहं तता ।। 14 ।।
इत्युक्तः सत्वरं तस्य प्रगृह्म चरणावुभौ ।
निदाघः प्राह भगवानाचार्य्यस्त्वमृबुध्रुर्वम् ।। 15 ।।
नान्यस्यादू तसंस्कारस्कृतं मानसं तथा ।
यथाचार्य्यस्य तन त्वां मन्ये प्राप्तमह गुरुम् ।। 16
तवोपदेशदानाय पूर्व्वशुश्रूषणादृतः ।
गुरुस्तेऽहमृभुर्नाम्रा निदाघ! समुपागतः ।। 17 ।।
तदेतदुपदिष्टं सङ्क्ष पेण महामते ।
परमार्थसारभूतं यददूतैमशेषतः ।। 18 ।।
एवमुक्त्वा ययौ विद्रान् निदाघं स ऋबुर्गुरुः ।
नदाघोऽप्युपदेशीन तेनादूतैपरोऽभवत् ।। 19 ।।
सर्व्भूतान्यभेदेन ददृशे स तदान्मनः ।
यथा ब्रह्मपरो मुक्तिपवाप परमां द्रिज ।। 20 ।।
तथा त्वमपि धर्म्मज्ञ ! तुल्यात्मरिपुबान्धवः ।
भव सर्व्वगतं जानन्नात्मानमवनीपते ।। 21 ।।
सितनीलादिभेदेन यथैकः दृश्यते नभः ।
भ्रान्तिदृष्टिभिरात्मापि तथैकं सन् पृथक् पृथक् ।। 22 ।।
एकः समस्तं यदिहास्ति किञ्चित्
तदच्युतो नास्ति परं ततोऽन्यत् ।
सोऽहं स च त्वं स च सर्व्वमेत- दात्मखरूपं त्यज भेदमोहम् ।। 23 ।।
पराशर उवाच ।
इतीरितस्तेन स राजवर्य्य
स्तत्याज भेदं परमार्थदृष्टिः ।
स चापि जातिस्मरणाप्तबोध-
स्तत्रैव जन्मन्यपवर्गमाप ।। 24 ।।
इति भरतःनरेन्द्रसारवृत्तं
कथयति यश्व श्वृणोति भक्तियुक्तः ।
स विमलमतिरेति नात्ममोहं
भवति च संसरणेषु मुक्तियोग्यः ।। 25 ।।

English Wilson 1840

CHAP. XVI.

Ribhu returns to his disciple, and perfects him in divine knowledge. The same recommended to the Rájá by Bharata, who thereupon obtains final liberation. Consequences of hearing this legend.

"AFTER the expiration of another thousand years, Ribhu again repaired to the city where Nidágha dwelt, to instruct him farther in true wisdom. When he arrived near the town, he beheld a prince entering into it, with a splendid retinue; and his pupil Nidágha standing afar off, avoiding the crowd; his throat shrivelled with starvation, and bearing from the thicket fuel and holy grass. Ribhu approached him, and saluting him reverentially (as if he was a stranger) demanded why he was standing in such a retired spot. Nidágha replied, 'There is a great crowd of people attending the entrance of the king into the town, and I am staying here to avoid it.' 'Tell me, excellent Brahman,' said Ribhu, 'for I believe that thou art wise, which is here the king, and which is any other man.' The king,' answered Nidágha, is he who is seated on the fierce and stately elephant, vast as a mountain peak; the others are his attendants.' You have shewn me,' observed Ribhu, 'at one moment the elephant and the king, without noticing any peculiar characteristic by which they may be distinguished. Tell me, venerable sir, is there any difference between them? for I am desirous to know which is here the elephant, which is the king.' 'The elephant,' answered Nidágha, 'is underneath; the king is above him. Who is not aware, Brahman, of the relation between that which bears and that which is borne?' To this Ribhu rejoined, 'Still explain to me, according to what I know of it, this matter: what is it that is meant by the word underneath, and what is it that is termed above?' As soon as he had uttered this, Nidágha jumped upon Ribhu, and said, 'Here is my answer to the question you have asked: I am above, like the Rájá.; you are underneath, like the elephant. This example, Brahman, is intended for your information.' Very well,' said Ribhu, you, it seems, are as it were the Rájá, and I am like the elephant; but come now do you tell me which of us two is you; which is I.'

p. 258

"When Nidágha heard these words, he immediately fell at the feet o the stranger, and said, Of a surety thou art my saintly preceptor Ribhu the mind of no other person is so fully imbued with the doctrines of unity as that of my teacher, and hence I know that thou art he.' To this Ribhu replied, 'I am your preceptor, by name Ribhu, who, pleased with: the dutiful attention he has received, has come to Nidágha to give him instruction: for this purpose have I briefly intimated to you divine truth, the essence of which is the non-duality of all.' Having thus spoken to Nidágha, the Brahman Ribhu went away, leaving his disciple profoundly impressed, by his instructions, with belief in unity. He beheld all beings thenceforth as the same with himself, and, perfect in holy knowledge, obtained final liberation.

"In like manner do thou, oh king, who knowest what duty is, regarding equally friend or foe, consider yourself as one with all that exists in the world. Even as the same sky is apparently diversified as white or blue, so Soul, which is in truth but one, appears to erroneous vision distinct in different persons. That One, which here is all things, is Achyuta (Vishńu); than whom there is none other. He is I; he is thou; he is all: this universe is his form. Abandon the error of distinction."

PARÁŚARA resumed.--The king, being thus instructed, opened his eyes to truth, and abandoned the notion of distinct existence: whilst the Brahman, who, through the recollection of his former lives, had acquired perfect knowledge, obtained now exemption from future birth. Whoever narrates or listens to the lessons inculcated in the dialogue between Bharata and the king, has his mind enlightened, mistakes not the nature of individuality, and in the course of his migrations becomes fitted for ultimate emancipation 1.

Translator’s notes (1)
  1. This legend is a good specimen of a sectarial graft upon a Pauráńik stem. It is in a great measure peculiar to the Vishńu P., as although it occurs also in the Bhágavata, it is narrated there in a much more concise manner, and in a strain that looks like an abridgment of our text.

Hall of Raziel™ · Raziel’s Library™ · from Raziel’s Mercy™, a lost Android recovery system.

English: H. H. Wilson, The Vishnu Purana: A System of Hindu Mythology and Tradition (London: John Murray for the Oriental Translation Fund, 1840), public domain. Transcription: Internet Sacred Text Archive (public-domain file; credit link requested by the archive). Wilson’s footnotes are his own, from the same 1840 edition. Sanskrit: Sanskrit Wikisource. The ancient text is public domain; Wikisource page text is shared under CC BY-SA 4.0.